DCS-Mirror
/
unfoldingWord_en_tn
mirror of https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn
2
0
Fork 0
Files Issues Releases Wiki Activity See in Reader
unfoldingWord_en_tn/tn_ACT.tsv

3521 lines
1.4 MiB
Raw Blame History

This file contains ambiguous Unicode characters

This file contains Unicode characters that might be confused with other characters. If you think that this is intentional, you can safely ignore this warning. Use the Escape button to reveal them.

Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Acts\n\n1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)\n2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)\n3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)\n4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)\n5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)\n6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)\n\nLuke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.\n\n### What is the book of Acts about?\n\nThe book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”\n\n### Who wrote the book of Acts?\n\nThe author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.\n\nLuke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the church?\n\nThe church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.\n\n### The kingdom of God\n\nThe “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Figurative usages in the book of Acts\n\n“arise/arising”\n\nLuke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.\n\n“brothers”\n\nLuke often uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts\n\n“to the same”\n\nThe phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.\n\n“in/to/into the temple”\n\nLuke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?\n\nThe following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.\n\nFirst, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets \[ \]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:\n- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”\n- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”\n- Acts 24:6–8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”\n- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”\n\nSecond, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:\n- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”\n- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”\n- Acts 10:19, “three men.” Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”\n- Acts 10:30, “Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”\n- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).\n- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”\n- Acts 15:17–18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Ascension\n\nThis chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])\n\n### Baptism\n\nLuke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])\n\n### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”\n\nSome scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Long sentence\n\nAs was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\n### The details of the death of Judas\n\nThere are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.\n\nIt is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.\n\nBut it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you could let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.\n\n### The 12 disciples\n\nThere is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.\n\nAll three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.\n\nOnce again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
1:1 q9ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
1:1 ryj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Θεόφιλε 1 **Theophilus** is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:1 a001 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1:1 a002 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:2 a003 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:2 n435 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:2 a424 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνελήμφθη 1 Luke is referring to Jesus being **taken up** into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:3 a004 οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
1:3 dup3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν 1 This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:3 a005 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 The word translated **proofs** describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:3 yc16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων 1 While the antecedent of **whom** is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:3 a006 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 a007 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1:4 vb7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι 1 The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1:4 sg4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 Jesus is referring to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a **promise** to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:4 a009 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:4 tj6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου 1 In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1:4 d3kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἠκούσατέ 1 Here, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In [1:6](../01/06.md), “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether **you** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:5 fnq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:5 a075 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ 1 After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:5 dzj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:5 a010 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας 1 Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1:6 n9wt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν 1 In the first instance, **they** describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, **they** refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in [1:8](../01/08.md) apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:6 a011 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:6 f7uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 a012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι 1 Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 y1fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς 1 The words **times** and **seasons** could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:7 a013 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:7 a014 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:8 ld4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες 1 Jesus is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:8 a015 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **power**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:8 vb4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:9 e1q1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βλεπόντων αὐτῶν 1 Your language may require you to specify the object of **looking**. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:9 l1cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπήρθη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:9 ug58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 Luke is using the **eyes** of the apostles to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:10 enu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated **heaven** here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:10 a017 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο 1 Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **two men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:10 a018 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1:10 a019 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄνδρες δύο 1 These were actually angels. Luke calls them **men** because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:10 a020 ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς 1 In this context, the word **white** likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
1:11 a021 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἳ & εἶπαν 1 This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 a022 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs οἳ & εἶπαν 1 If you retain the word **they** in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
1:11 gpg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:11 a024 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? 1 The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1:11 a025 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες 1 The expression **stand** means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:11 a026 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν & ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν 1 In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 a027 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:11 cue7 ὃν τρόπον 1 Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
1:12 x2nk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν 1 The word **they** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:12 a028 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:12 a029 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 **Olivet** is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:12 a030 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 The expression **having a journey** refers to a distance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:12 p19g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 The **journey of a Sabbath** was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:13 vis2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτε εἰσῆλθον 1 The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:13 zt12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες 1 In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression **upper chamber** describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:13 a032 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου 1 These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:13 a033 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰάκωβος & Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας & Ἰακώβου 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:13 a034 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς 1 **Simon** is the name of a man, and **Zealot** is another name by which he was known. (1) **Zealot** could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) **Zealot** could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
1:14 z6cf ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
1:14 a035 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γυναιξὶν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in [Luke 8:2–3](../luk/08/02.md) and [23:49](../luk/23/49.md). Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 a037 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
1:15 il8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1:15 cup2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:15 a038 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 Peter **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1:15 liz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:15 a039 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. As the General Introduction to Acts suggests, here and throughout the book, if you retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that it has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1:15 tl5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι 1 Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:15 a040 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 Luke is using the term **names** to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:15 a041 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
1:16 a042 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:16 a043 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:16 a045 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1:16 i8tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:16 a046 προεῖπε 1 Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
1:16 f3um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ 1 Peter is using the word **mouth** to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:16 a048 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 Peter is using the act of guiding **the ones arresting Jesus** to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:17 q73y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Peter uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for a result that is described in [1:21–22](../01/21.md), after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in [1:16](../01/16.md). The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:17 a049 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1:17 a050 κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 Peter is using the term **numbered** in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
1:17 a051 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:17 tmv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word **us** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **us** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:17 a052 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in [1:18–19](../01/18.md). The quotation resumes in [1:20](../01/20.md). If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1:18 tmv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background μὲν οὖν 1 Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:18 dd58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οὗτος 1 Luke is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1:18 a053 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:18 w83j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:18 kg3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:18 a054 πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 The word **headfirst** describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
1:18 a055 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:19 a056 γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The verb form is not passive here, since **known** is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make **it** the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
1:19 a057 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:19 a058 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:19 mxf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Ἁκελδαμάχ 1 **Akeldama** is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **Field of Blood**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
1:20 mz13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks γέγραπται γὰρ 1 Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1:20 d7pk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1:20 ip5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:20 g30d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1:20 crk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1:20 hiul rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, please make his habitation desolate, and please make no one dwell in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:20 mc45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1:20 chq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 The word **habitation** likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:20 a059 τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 The word **overseership** refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in [1 Timothy 3:1](../1ti/03/01.md). Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
1:20 uctm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May another take his overseership” or “Another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1:20 jdsg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1:20 elz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or “God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:21 t916 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1:21 xz69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς 1 In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:21 zuf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς 1 Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:22 qb8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **baptism**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:22 a061 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς 1 While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:22 a062 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀνελήμφθη & τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:22 yi3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:22 a063 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν & σὺν ἡμῖν 1 When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:22 mrx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἕνα τούτων 1 Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **these** as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1:22 g3n9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:23 lz7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔστησαν δύο 1 The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:23 a064 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἔστησαν δύο 1 Luke is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1:23 a065 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἔστησαν δύο 1 When the believers **stood up** these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1:23 a066 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρσαββᾶν & Ἰοῦστος 1 **Joseph** is the name of a man, and **Barsabbas** and **Justus** are two other names by which he was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. **Justus** is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:23 s1ff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:23 a067 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μαθθίαν 1 **Matthias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:24 a068 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1:24 a069 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 Together the words **praying** and **said** indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:24 zd1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:24 a070 σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
1:24 se6m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:24 a071 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal σὺ Κύριε 1 The word **you** is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
1:24 a072 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα 1 The person who is praying is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1:25 mg47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς 1 The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **apostleship** identifies what kind of **ministry** this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:25 ryv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας 1 The expression **turned aside** means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:25 tx6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον 1 This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:26 a073 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:26 r84c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the believers and the pronoun **them** refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun **them** and if your language marks the dual form, **them** would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:26 a074 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 The term **lots** describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:26 w4ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν 1 The word **fell** means “selected.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:26 fk4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνκατεψηφίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:intro x8fr 0 # Acts 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pentecost\n\nThe events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.\n\n### Tongues\n\nLuke uses the Greek word “tongues” to mean two different things in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. For clarity, ULT translates the use in 2:3 as “tongues” and the use in 2:4 as “languages.”\n\n### Last days\n\nIn 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])\n\n### The prophecy of Joel\n\nIn 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### Baptize\n\nIn this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1–11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])\n\n### Wonders and signs\n\nThese words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “You killed” (2:23)\n\nThe Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.\n\n### Long sentences\n\nThere is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\nThere is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\n### Poetry\n\nThe quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]].
2:1 i4sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:1 a076 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:1 a425 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:1 i4sb rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ 1 Here the word **they** refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:1 a077 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
2:2 qjc3 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 The word translated **heaven** could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from **heaven** itself.
2:2 a078 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:2 jec5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 Luke speaks of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 a079 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 Luke speaks of this sound as if it **filled** the **house**. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 t4y4 ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 Luke may be using the word translated **house** in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
2:2 a080 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι 1 Luke may be using the term **sitting** to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:3 re3t γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός 1 This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in [Isaiah 5:24](../isa/05/24.md), for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
2:3 xtk4 διαμεριζόμεναι 1 This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
2:3 a081 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the objects, and the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:3 a082 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 Luke is using the word **sat** to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 v7hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:4 a251 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 a083 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2:4 nr9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 The implication, as [2:6–11](../02/06.md) makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:4 a084 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 Here, **giving** has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
2:4 a085 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 The word translated **to speak out** means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
2:5 dz1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
2:5 yft2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς 1 Luke is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:5 stq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole παντὸς ἔθνους 1 The word **every** is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:5 a086 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 1 The expression **under heaven** is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:6 bpj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνεχύθη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:6 u9hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:7 m8kd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο & καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:7 a087 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:7 a088 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 **Behold** is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:7 wnk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχ & ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι 1 The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:8 hzm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν? 1 The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:8 a090 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 The speakers are using the word translated **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:8 a091 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος 1 Your language may require you to specify the object of **hearing**. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:8 a092 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν 1 The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:8 wb5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 The speakers say that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:8 a093 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:9 f1ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πάρθοι & Μῆδοι & Ἐλαμεῖται 1 These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:9 dm23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον & Ἀσίαν 1 These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:10 tmb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φρυγίαν & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον & Λιβύης 1 These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:11 w8jy Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι 1 The term **proselytes** describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase **both Jews and proselytes** could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in [2:9–11](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
2:11 jnp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κρῆτες & Ἄραβες 1 These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:11 a097 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:12 el2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο 1 The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:12 a098 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο & λέγοντες 1 These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:12 a099 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What does this mean?” or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:13 a100 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:13 fg59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:13 jj1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown γλεύκους 1 This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:14 k5hr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ 1 Peter **stood** to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles **stood** with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2:14 c919 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς ἕνδεκα 1 Luke is using the adjective **eleven** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:14 d9tb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς 1 The idiom **raised up his voice** means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:14 a102 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:14 a103 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:14 a104 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες 1 This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 ei5j τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
2:14 hal2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you” or “this should be known to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
2:14 brjc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent (**you**), so you can use an active form with that agent as the implied subject. Alternate translation: “know this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:14 a105 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Peter uses the word translated **and** to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:14 qp16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου 1 Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term **ears** to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 a106 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Peter says **for** in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:15 a107 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The demonstrative pronoun **these** refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:15 a108 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 Peter says **for** in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:15 a109 ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
2:15 h28q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:15 a110 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
2:16 f9hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:16 ktw9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:17 a111 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 The material in [2:17–21](../02/17.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase **God says** to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:17 a112 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:17 ijl8 καὶ ἔσται 1 Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
2:17 a113 ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
2:17 u2d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 God says that he will **pour out** his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 a114 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 God refers to **flesh** to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 a115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται 1 If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:17 a116 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ὑμῶν -1 If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of **your** as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:17 a117 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οἱ νεανίσκοι & οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 God speaks separately of **sons** and **daughters** in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between **young** and **old**. So the word **men** could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:18 uwd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν 1 You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2:18 nd34 ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου 1 If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
2:18 a118 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 Here, **days** means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:18 wz2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ & ἐπὶ & ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 See how you translated this in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 a119 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ δώσω 1 You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:19 a120 δώσω τέρατα & καὶ σημεῖα 1 Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
2:19 a121 ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω 1 Since God specifies in the next verse that these **wonders** will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated **heaven** likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
2:19 p5zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ 1 Here the possessive form describes **vapor** that looks smoky or that has **smoke** in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:20 ylv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:20 a6yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:20 a122 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 God is speaking as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:20 a123 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **darkness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:20 a124 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:20 a125 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:20 f34k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 God is speaking as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:20 swb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 The words **great** and **remarkable** mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:20 lc4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:20 a126 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:21 a127 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:21 a128 καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
2:21 vql5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:21 a129 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται 1 The expression **call on** means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:21 a130 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:21 a131 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:21 a132 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:21 a133 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks σωθήσεται 1 This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:22 sa78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:22 g6vj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:22 f2t1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:22 a135 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις 1 The terms **mighty works**, **wonders**, and **signs** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:23 a136 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:23 i6un rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον 1 The term translated **given up** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:23 s38b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **counsel** and **foreknowledge**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:23 a137 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The word **determined** is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:23 f5kn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀνείλατε 1 It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:23 e38a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων 1 Here, **hand** refers to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:23 a138 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀνόμων 1 Peter is using the adjective **lawless** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:23 f6kd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνόμων 1 By **lawless**, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:23 a197 προσπήξαντες 1 This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
2:24 a140 ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
2:24 ei37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:24 s8j3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 Peter speaks of the **agonies of death** as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:24 a141 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 Peter uses the possessive form to describe **death** as something that is characterized by **agonies.** Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:24 a142 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why this was **not possible**. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:24 ykq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:24 vuf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Peter speaks of death as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:25 dd5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from [Psalm 16:8–11](../psa/16/08.md).) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:25 a143 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns **I** and **my** are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:25 a144 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Peter uses the word **For** to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:25 a145 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Δαυεὶδ & λέγει εἰς αὐτόν 1 Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what **David says** in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:25 n2ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν μου 1 The phrase **before me**, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:25 tqak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:25 a146 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 Here the adjective **right** is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:25 l6xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 In this context, to be at someone’s right side means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:25 a147 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 Here, **moved** means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:25 s4yp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:26 a148 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:26 z8vw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου 1 Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:26 a149 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου 1 Here, the **tongue** represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:26 zz6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 Here, **flesh** means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:26 a150 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **hope**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:26 a151 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 The Messiah is speaking as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:26 a152 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **hope** the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:27 m3ij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:27 a153 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2:27 whi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις & οὐδὲ δώσεις & σου 1 The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
2:27 a154 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 The Messiah says **my soul** to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:27 a156 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:27 rld3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:27 a157 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:27 l5cd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:28 a158 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:28 a159 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal ἐγνώρισάς & πληρώσεις & σου 1 The words **you** and **your** are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
2:28 xhi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς 1 The Messiah speaks of **life** as if it consisted of **paths** that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word **known** refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:28 ej5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης 1 The Messiah speaks as if he were a container that God could **fill** with **gladness**. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:28 y7gf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:28 a161 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:29 pv1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:29 ps7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:29 wh97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ 1 A **patriarch** is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:29 vtc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:29 a162 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης 1 Peter is using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:30 a163 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Peter uses the word **Therefore** to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:30 a164 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προφήτης & ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς 1 Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:30 x11q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 Peter is using the word **loins** to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:30 hq71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:31 a165 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐλάλησεν & ἐνκατελείφθη & αὐτοῦ 1 The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:31 a166 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:31 tn4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:31 a167 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:31 a169 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:31 a170 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 Peter is using the word **flesh** to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:31 up5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:32 udn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός 1 As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:32 kw6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 By **we**, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:33 a171 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word **Therefore**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:33 kij2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:33 c9mr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:33 a172 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:33 a173 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:33 a174 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
2:33 c1dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξέχεεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:33 wsg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξέχεεν 1 Peter says that Jesus has **poured out** the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in [2:17](../02/17.md), to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:34 m7fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγει & αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 The material in [2:34–35](../02/34.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David ([Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2:34 i8wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 **The Lord** means God here, and **my Lord** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:34 a175 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Here the adjective **right** is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:34 kvn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:35 nf1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 The psalm says that God would make the Messiah’s **enemies** a **stool** for his **feet** to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:35 a176 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:36 a177 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:36 msqt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
2:36 tgbf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:36 pnp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:37 s85q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀκούσαντες & κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:37 xan1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:37 w1ma κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
2:37 l15x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 Luke is speaking. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:37 zls6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:37 a178 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:37 a179 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τί ποιήσωμεν 1 The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:38 a180 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you μετανοήσατε & βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν & λήμψεσθε 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2:38 cmb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαπτισθήτω 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:38 geb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express your allegiance to Jesus Christ as your Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:38 a181 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:39 a182 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:39 a183 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:39 a184 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:39 v8vi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν 1 Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in [11:18](../11/18.md). So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:39 a185 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 By **the Lord our God**, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:39 a186 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἂν προσκαλέσηται 1 Peter is using the word **call** in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:40 a187 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἑτέροις & λόγοις πλείοσιν 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:40 v6ip rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς 1 Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2:40 a188 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σώθητε 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:40 wtd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 The implication is that God is going to punish **this perverse generation**. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:40 a189 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 The word **perverse** describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this **generation** rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:41 k1kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory οὖν 1 Luke uses the word **Therefore** to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2:41 r9qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **received** means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:41 a190 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:41 kz64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:41 sv5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ψυχαὶ 1 Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:41 a47f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσετέθησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:42 a191 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἦσαν & προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:42 gc59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:42 a192 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:43 a193 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:43 gi9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:43 a194 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:43 ys3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο 1 Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:43 q6dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:44 u8qk ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
2:44 jy2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά 1 Luke may be saying **all** as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:45 h8tn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον 1 The words **properties** and **possessions** mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:45 f74s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ 1 Here the pronoun **they** refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun **them** refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:45 n9hi πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
2:46 in43 καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
2:46 a427 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:46 q1ge rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:46 i2yk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:46 a195 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:47 z6ig rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:47 kc42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:47 a196 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
3:intro hpd9 0 # Acts 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The covenant God made with Abraham\n\nThis chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Servant”\n\nTwice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in Chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.\n\n### “You killed” (3:15)\n\nFor the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
3:1 b5rm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
3:1 br7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:1 a198 τὴν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
3:1 a199 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3:2 f227 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **was being carried**. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:2 u6nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καί τις ἀνὴρ 1 In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3:2 j68t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 Luke is describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the **womb** of his **mother** when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:2 a200 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν λεγομένην 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:2 a201 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὡραίαν 1 **Beautiful** is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:2 a202 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:3 a203 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν 1 The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him **alms** (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:4 xq4u ἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν 1 This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
3:4 e3c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of **us** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:6 x6bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον 1 Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** and **gold** were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:6 zi9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι 1 What happens next in the story shows that by **what I have**, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:6 t2vf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:6 a205 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative περιπάτει 1 This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
3:7 ec6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 In this verse, the pronoun **he** refers to Peter, while the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:7 a206 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:8 a207 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:8 abc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **he** refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:8 q13i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
3:8 zp7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:9 a208 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:10 zy7h ἐπεγίνωσκον & αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ & καθήμενος 1 Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
3:10 p2zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ 1 This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:10 a209 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:10 j6zf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:10 a210 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 Luke is speaking as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:10 a211 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wonder** and **amazement**, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:11 a212 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:11 rk1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος 1 This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:11 rj43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ καλουμένῃ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:12 ndi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:12 uyg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ 1 Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:12 j6ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν? 1 Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:12 g4y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἰδίᾳ 1 By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:12 mwd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ 1 Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
3:13 q8q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀβραὰμ & Ἰσαὰκ & Ἰακώβ 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:13 a213 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:13 kmqw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 The term **fathers** could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could state “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:13 a214 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν 1 See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
3:13 a215 παρεδώκατε 1 Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
3:13 cp1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου 1 Here the phrase **before the face of** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:13 yy96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν 1 Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds **one** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3:14 a217 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3:14 a218 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 Peter is using both the adjective **Holy** and the adjective **Righteous** to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds **One** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3:14 a219 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 The terms **Holy** and **Righteous** mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:14 a220 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:14 s6qj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:15 a221 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀπεκτείνατε 1 It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:15 ljn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν & Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς 1 Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:15 a222 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3:15 jwb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:15 a223 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἡμεῖς 1 If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun **we** here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:16 abc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
3:16 qt8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:16 a224 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 Peter is using the **name** of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:16 abc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 1 The first instance of the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:16 a225 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην 1 Peter is speaking of **faith** as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:17 v45t καὶ νῦν 1 Peter uses the expression **And now** to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
3:17 a226 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Peter addresses the people as his **brothers** because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:17 x62k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε 1 Peter likely means that the people **acted in ignorance** of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:17 a228 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3:18 gcc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως 1 Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God **fulfilled** prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
3:18 ms6d διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, **the prophets**, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **mouth**. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
3:18 z3l7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:18 a229 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 Peter is using the word **all** as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:19 cw18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψατε 1 Peter is speaking of his listeners as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:19 zm6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:19 a230 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically **wiped away** when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:20 a231 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Peter is speaking of these **times** as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:20 x3ca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **refreshment**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:20 f2wm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Peter is using the term **face** to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:20 h3nk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀποστείλῃ 1 Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:20 yzr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:21 vgn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 Peter is speaking of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:21 x2f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:21 a2m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 The expression **from the age** means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:21 a12i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:22 a232 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3:22 a249 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3:22 a250 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:22 v5nf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει 1 Here the expression **raise up** does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in [2:24](../02/24.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md). In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:22 t8di rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 Moses is using the term **brothers** to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:22 a234 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
3:22 a235 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:23 a236 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3:23 t8a5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:23 a237 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
3:23 a238 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις 1 Moses is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:23 a239 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου 1 Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:24 u6x3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες & οἱ προφῆται 1 Here the phrase **all the prophets** is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in [3:18](../03/18.md). It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets **announced these days**. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you could translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:24 xp9h ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς 1 Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
3:24 m9pr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 Peter is using the word **days** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:24 a241 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:25 rh2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Peter is using the word **sons** in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:25 a242 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οἱ υἱοὶ 1 Although the term **sons** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:25 a243 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 The figurative sense of **sons** as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:25 a244 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3:25 a245 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:25 wid4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:25 mad5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:25 a246 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 As the apostle Paul notes in [Galatians 3:16](../gal/03/16.md), God used the singular form of the word **seed** when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:25 a247 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:25 g31m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Here, **families** refers to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:26 b7tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν 1 The expression **raised up** has the same meaning here as in [3:22](../03/22.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
3:26 x8ss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **turning** someone **from** something means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:26 a248 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wickedness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:intro pv3a 0 # Acts 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Unity\n\nThe first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.\n\n### “Signs and wonders”\n\nThis phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)\n\nThe cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “no other name” (4:12)\n\n“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
4:1 abc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λαλούντων & αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:1 ew3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:1 m74s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:1 d3tv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4:2 abc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:2 mg5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows **the resurrection** to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:2 np5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4:3 a254 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:3 a255 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:3 zla7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:3 a256 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **custody**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:3 h5f9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη 1 The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in [4:5–6](../04/05.md), would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:4 a257 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
4:4 a258 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:4 bm1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν 1 Luke is not using the word **men** in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate **men** as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4:4 qd8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε 1 The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:5 lw2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
4:5 cdj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in [4:15](../04/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:5 j6p8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:5 i9tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συναχθῆναι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:6 a259 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας 1 Luke describes Annas as **the high priest**, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:6 l44n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἅννας & Καϊάφας & Ἰωάννης & Ἀλέξανδρος 1 These are the names of four men. The **John** mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:6 a260 ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
4:7 abc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:7 t1eq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς? 1 The words **power** and **name** (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:7 jc21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι 1 Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:7 a261 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual ὑμεῖς 1 Since the council members are speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as **them** in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
4:8 su5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:8 a262 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Luke is speaking of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:8 a263 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι 1 Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the **elders**, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to [Exodus 24:1](../exo/24/01.md), that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:8 a264 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 Here, **the people** means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:9 pq85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται 1 Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, **a good deed to a sick man**. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
4:9 je6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς & ἀνακρινόμεθα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:9 b92n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὗτος σέσωσται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:10 q9ss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
4:10 snd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:10 j3px rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πᾶσιν ὑμῖν 1 The pronoun **you** refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:10 khn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 1 Here, **name** refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:10 a265 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 See how you translated this in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:10 a266 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε 1 It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4:10 jyj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:10 a267 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4:11 nwg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 The pronoun **He** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:11 w195 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 Peter is quoting from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md), and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:11 c1bh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:11 f1nx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:12 a268 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
4:12 tq3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:12 l66w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:12 iz7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον & ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:12 jm25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:12 a269 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4:12 gg8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:12 tdw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Peter is using the word **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4:13 r6d6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom θεωροῦντες 1 Luke is using the word **seeing** to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:13 t6kc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:13 qaa5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καταλαβόμενοι 1 The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:13 xn39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν 1 Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:13 erv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται 1 The words **uneducated** and **ordinary** mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:14 h3cy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:14 a270 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:14 fq4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν 1 The implication is that anything the council members said **in opposition** would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:15 ql31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:15 a272 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:16 p4g6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? 1 This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:16 jn12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:16 nh5s γνωστὸν σημεῖον 1 Here the word **sign** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
4:17 a273 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:17 f71l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 By **it**, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:17 a274 ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 Alternate translation: “any further”
4:17 w52j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:17 a275 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
4:17 a276 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, **men** has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4:18 a277 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:18 a278 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:18 a279 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν 1 The words **speak** and **teach** mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:18 a280 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:19 a281 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
4:19 a282 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:19 jf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:19 a283 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:20 a284 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Peter and John are using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:20 hf3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν 1 Peter and John are using the word **we** to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4:20 a285 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ δυνάμεθα & ἡμεῖς & μὴ λαλεῖν 1 You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
4:21 y5y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:21 z2bx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τὸν λαόν 1 The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:21 jbl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν 1 Here, **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:22 gy8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
4:22 a286 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:22 ju4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 Luke is speaking as if the **healing** had **happened** on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4:22 a287 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 Luke is using the possessive form to describe a **sign** that consisted of a **healing**. The word **sign** has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4:23 a288 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπολυθέντες 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:23 a289 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
4:23 j2cx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἰδίους 1 The phrase **their own people** refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:23 a290 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 As Peter does in [4:8](../04/08.md), here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:24 j3ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἦραν 1 The phrase **having heard** refers to the other believers, but the pronoun **they** seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus ([4:29](../04/29.md)). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:24 a291 ἦραν φωνὴν 1 Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
4:24 zu28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦραν φωνὴν 1 The expression **they raised their voice** is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:24 a292 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
4:24 a293 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal σὺ 1 The word **you** is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in [4:25–30](../04/25.md). You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
4:24 a160 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:24 a294 τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 The believers are using the word translated **heaven** in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
4:25 ka83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών 1 The word **mouth** refers to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:25 vc5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, [Psalm 2:1–2](../psa/02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
4:25 a295 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The believers are using the word **our** to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4:25 kat6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς 1 Here, **father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:25 a296 παιδός 1 The believers are using the word **servant** here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md).
4:25 a297 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4:25 a298 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
4:25 f1x6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:25 w622 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κενά 1 The phrase **useless things** implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:26 fb5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in [4:25](../04/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
4:26 w2by rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
4:26 w64b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς 1 The expression **took their stand** describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:26 a299 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:26 a300 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
4:26 yv19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου & τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:27 b1g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:27 nuc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 The phrase **this city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:27 ca33 παῖδά 1 Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah”
4:27 a303 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃν ἔχρισας 1 In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:28 yz7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 Here, **hand** means God’s power and **counsel** means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:28 a304 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 The words **hand** and **counsel**, joined by **and**, are expressing a single idea. The word **hand**, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his **counsel**, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
4:28 a305 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 The believers are speaking of God’s **hand** and his **counsel** (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had **predetermined** what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4:29 b38z καὶ τὰ νῦν 1 The believers use the expression **And now** to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
4:29 t5qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν 1 The phrase **look upon** is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:29 a306 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τοῖς δούλοις σου 1 The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
4:29 zh7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου 1 The believers are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:29 a307 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:30 x9r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι 1 Here the **hand** represents God’s power. To **stretch out** the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:30 a308 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα 1 The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:30 t5uw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:30 txb5 τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md), [3:26](../03/26.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md). Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
4:31 a309 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory καὶ 1 This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
4:31 a310 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:31 x9b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσαλεύθη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:31 ps3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:31 a311 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:31 a312 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:31 a313 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:32 a314 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information in [4:32–37](../04/32.md) that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word **Now** with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
4:32 xu3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 Here the word **heart** seems to represent the emotions and the word **soul** seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:32 a315 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 The terms **heart** and **soul** mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:32 a316 τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ 1 Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
4:32 zyp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά 1 The word **everything** may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:44](../02/44.md). Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:33 a317 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:33 a318 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in [4:32](../04/32.md). It does not refer just to the **apostles**, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:33 d8dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:34 a331 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
4:34 a319 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Luke uses the word **For** in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:34 a320 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 Luke uses the word **for** in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:34 gw3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον 1 The phrase **as many as** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:34 l938 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:35 a321 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 The expression **laying it at the feet** indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they received onto the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
4:35 vv4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:35 a322 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διεδίδετο 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:35 ps4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **need**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:36 uc2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Ἰωσὴφ δὲ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
4:36 a323 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρναβᾶς 1 **Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:36 a324 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:36 a325 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:36 a326 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:36 nr4v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 The expression **Son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:36 a327 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **Encouragement**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:37 a330 ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [4:32](../04/32.md). Alternate translation: “that he owned”
4:37 gtv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [4:35](../04/35.md). Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:intro k2uh 0 # Acts 5 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)\n\nNo one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1–10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Long sentences\n\nActs 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\nThere is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
5:1 v27a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
5:1 ysl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 **Ananias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5:1 a332 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
5:1 a333 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σαπφείρῃ 1 **Sapphira** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5:2 a334 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could state why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:2 xm1t συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι & ἔθηκεν 1 It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
5:2 dy8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν 1 This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in [4:37](../04/37.md). Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:3 grr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου? 1 Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:3 pqd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 Peter is speaking of the **heart** of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had **filled**. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:3 a335 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:3 a426 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου 1 Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
5:3 zz5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:3 a336 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:4 vu7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν? 1 Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:4 vi8w ἔμενεν 1 Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
5:4 k7nc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πραθὲν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:4 a337 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 The pronoun **it** refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:4 a338 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:4 i5dw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:4 a339 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:4 a340 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 Peter speaks of **this thing**, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had **placed** it in his **heart**, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:4 a341 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Ananaias actually has **lied to men**, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:4 a342 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5:5 a343 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκούων δὲ & τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:5 cc5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 The word translated **expired** means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
5:5 a344 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
5:5 a345 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:6 a346 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 Here the expression **rising up** means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:6 a347 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ νεώτεροι 1 This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:6 a348 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
5:7 a349 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:7 ry54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:7 k3c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ γεγονὸς 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:8 a350 ἀπεκρίθη & πρὸς αὐτὴν 1 The word translated **said** means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
5:8 a351 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual ἀπέδοσθε 1 Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:8 bcf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοσούτου & ναί, τοσούτου 1 This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:9 v7sw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου? 1 Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:9 hc22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:9 w1lb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῖν & σου & σε 1 The word **you** in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word **your** and the word **you** in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:9 pg1e πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 Here the word **test** means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
5:9 a352 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md). Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:9 a353 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες 1 Peter says **Behold** to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:9 xj1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 Peter is referring to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their **feet** represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The **door** represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:9 a354 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:9 a355 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε 1 The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will **carry** her **out** to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:10 s7en rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν 1 The word translated **expired** means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
5:10 a356 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν 1 Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
5:10 nwb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:10 a357 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ νεανίσκοι 1 See how you translated this expression in [5:6](../05/06.md). However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these **young men** were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:11 vym8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory καὶ 1 This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
5:11 a358 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα 1 Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:12 c2e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce background information in [5:12–16](../05/12.md) that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
5:12 sri8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ 1 Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:12 ux3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:12 aud2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν & πάντες 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:12 a359 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
5:12 k99k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος 1 This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in [3:11](../03/11.md), which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5:13 a360 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν & λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς 1 The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:13 a361 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:14 a362 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke says **the Lord** to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:14 m9wx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:14 oxni rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
5:15 a364 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5:15 l9bs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐκφέρειν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:15 a365 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς 1 Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:15 a366 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων 1 The words **cots** and **mats** mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:15 y2ev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:15 a367 ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
5:16 a368 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀσθενεῖς 1 See how you translated the expression **the sick** in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:16 fu1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:16 lyc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:16 a369 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 It does not appear that **all** is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat **all** as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5:17 x2ed rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:17 f9ye rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 The high priest and these Sadducees were first **filled with jealousy** and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
5:17 pc45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:17 a370 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:17 a371 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:17 a372 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:17 a373 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 Luke is speaking as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:18 j58p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:18 a374 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
5:19 wd37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξαγαγών & αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:20 qm16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the angel says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:20 z1x3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 The angel is using the term **words** to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:20 a375 τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
5:21 a376 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀκούσαντες 1 Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:21 df1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:21 l7uf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον 1 The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:21 a377 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
5:21 a378 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παραγενόμενος 1 This does not mean that the high priest and his allies **arrived** in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:21 a379 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 The phrase **even all the elders of the sons of Israel** clarifies the name **Sanhedrin** by describing it membership. Luke is using the word **elders** here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:21 a380 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:21 li6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον 1 Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
5:23 a381 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:23 a382 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **security**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:23 a383 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνοίξαντες 1 Your language may require you to specify the object of **opened**. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:23 ld7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν 1 By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5:24 k5g6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:24 baw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns περὶ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **them** does not refer to the apostles but to the **words** that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:24 p78m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο 1 The expression **what this might become** refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:25 a384 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 This person says **Behold** to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:25 a8dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἔθεσθε 1 Here the word **you** refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:25 c1am rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the messenger says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:26 e24h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:27 iq7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:28 a385 παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν 1 For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
5:28 f7pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῖν & πεπληρώκατε & ὑμῶν & βούλεσθε 1 In this verse the words **you** and **your** refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:28 g2hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 The high priest is using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:28 a386 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε 1 The high priest says **behold** to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:28 j4kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν 1 The high priest is speaking of the city of **Jerusalem** as if it were a container that the apostles had **filled** with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:28 a387 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 The high priest is speaking as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:28 a388 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5:28 ym1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα 1 The high priest is using the term **blood** to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:28 a389 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου 1 The phrase **this man** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:29 a390 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
5:29 di9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:29 a391 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5:30 a392 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:30 kwsc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5:30 r7av rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν 1 As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:30 a393 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 The word **you** is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:30 a394 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
5:30 pu5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 The word translated as **tree** can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:30 a395 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 In some languages the word **hung** would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:31 a396 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:31 a397 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:31 uh2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 God placing Jesus at his **right** side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:31 mr1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:31 q1il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Peter is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:32 a398 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word **we** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5:32 a399 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
5:32 yml6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:33 abx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the council members and the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:34 i2rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τις & Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
5:34 a401 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γαμαλιήλ 1 **Gamaliel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5:34 a402 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
5:34 fpr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:34 a403 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5:34 a404 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 Here, **rising up** means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:34 xk6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι 1 Your language may require you to specify the object of **commanded**. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:34 a405 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj βραχὺ 1 Luke is using the adjective **little** as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:35 a406 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential τε 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
5:35 a407 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:35 ae1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν 1 Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could state that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:36 a408 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸ & τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:36 a409 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Θευδᾶς 1 **Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5:36 uaj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 In this context, **rose up** means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:36 b3nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν 1 In this context, the expression **somebody** means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:36 a410 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:36 ie3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνῃρέθη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:36 juz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:36 a411 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διελύθησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:36 rzg5 καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν 1 Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
5:37 f33y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj μετὰ τοῦτον 1 Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:37 a412 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος 1 The word **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5:37 a413 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 As in [5:36](../05/36.md), **rose up** here means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:37 p56f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς 1 Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:37 kz4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **drew away** is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:37 a414 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj κἀκεῖνος 1 Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:37 a415 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 If your language would not use the passive form **were persuaded**, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:37 a416 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διεσκορπίσθησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:38 i4bw καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
5:38 a417 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Gamaliel is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5:38 wz89 ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 When Gamaliel tells the council to **keep away from these men**, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
5:38 zh1d ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο 1 Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
5:38 a418 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Gamaliel is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts **from men** here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5:38 uql8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλυθήσεται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:39 a419 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were **from God**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:39 j819 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5:39 a420 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μήποτε 1 It may be helpful to state the implications of the word **lest** explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:39 a421 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:39 a422 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὑρεθῆτε 1 The expression **be found** means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:39 cyp1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπείσθησαν & αὐτῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:40 z31c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5:40 p6lz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν 1 The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
5:40 fca9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 The Sanhedrin members are using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:41 a423 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 Luke is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:41 cv8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατηξιώθησαν 1 If your language would not use the passive form **had been considered**, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:41 lk82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 Here, **the Name** means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:42 jj94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory τε 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
5:42 kyp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:42 x424 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι 1 Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
6:intro z5r5 0 # Acts 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nActs [6:7](../06/07.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The distribution to the widows\n\nThe believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “His face was like the face of an angel”\n\nNo one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
6:1 f8br rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
6:1 cg5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:1 e7vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:1 s4qy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:1 rde8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **service**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:2 kwvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6:2 n5r4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
6:2 is74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names οἱ δώδεκα 1 Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:2 jm17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The apostles are speaking as if they would walk away from the **word of God** and **leave** it **behind** them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:2 w9re rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:2 fwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:3 lcyx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:3 p1yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους 1 The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:3 mgid rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:3 pxe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:3 i27a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:4 b3bj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 The apostles are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:5 wh9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους 1 Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:5 jayc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6:5 ajq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Στέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον 1 These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:5 vsyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:5 yqsj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:5 cg5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀντιοχέα 1 The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:6 lvaj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
6:6 wu1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 The apostles **placed their hands** on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
6:7 x48w rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
6:7 wu4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:7 ueie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:7 jg8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
6:7 qq3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:8 et2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Στέφανος δὲ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
6:8 pzr0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:8 h8sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
6:8 xscq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:8 m0zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα 1 The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
6:9 d74m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:9 nei0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:9 k88n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:9 e7b0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας 1 The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:10 v5ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 In this context, the expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:10 fnb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
6:10 psha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:11 ren5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:11 s2cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6:11 x747 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 The men are using the term **words** to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:12 tqk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
6:12 l251 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 Luke says that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:13 zv6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
6:13 ju6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 The men are using the term **words** to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:13 o3j2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:14 uok4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 1 By **this place**, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:14 vak4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:15 k8rw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου 1 Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like **the face of an angel**. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
7:intro p9h4 0 # Acts 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in [6:13–14](../06/13.md). Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin.\n- (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him\n- (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses\n- (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law\n- (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave\n- (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built\n- (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build\n- (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members\n- (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50.\n\nA note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses.\n\nIt appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Stephen said”\n\nStephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.\n\n### “Full of the Holy Spirit”\n\nThe Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.\n\n### Foreshadowing\n\nWhen an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in [7:58](../07/58.md), even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Implied information\n\nStephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Metonymy\n\nStephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Important Textual issues in this Chapter\n\n### “a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46)\n\nIn [7:46](../07/46.md), some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Background knowledge\n\nThe Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes.\n\n### Reference of “our” and “you”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.
7:1 hy9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἀρχιερεύς 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nLuke assumes that his readers will know that **the high priest** was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:2 abc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ ἔφη 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:2 zbq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 The phrase **Men, brothers and fathers** is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:2 v5si rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word **fathers** to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:2 kfep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:2 n09p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in [6:11](../06/11.md) that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the **God of glory** acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:2 pt4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7:2 w1ya rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ 1 Stephen is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:3 uksj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:3 kgef rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, while the pronoun **him** refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:4 pfg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κατῴκησεν & αὐτοῦ & μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν 1 The pronouns **his** and **him** and the first instance of the word **he** refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word **he** refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:4 pfg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 The word **you** is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listening to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7:5 tnsm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐπηγγείλατο & αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & αὐτόν & οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ 1 The pronouns **him** and **his** and the third instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of **he** refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:5 ax1j οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
7:5 qff6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός 1 This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:5 u6iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:5 j09v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **possession** with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:6 orw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
7:6 tn6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:6 jymv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν 1 Stephen is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun **stranger** and the singular pronoun **him**. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could state “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun **them**. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:7 k8pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:7 f7fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ἔθνος 1 Here, **nation** refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:7 q7y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν 1 As in [7:6](../07/06.md), Stephen is using the singular pronoun **him** because he is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:8 iwfx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐγέννησεν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **he** refers to God, while the word **him** and the second instance of the pronoun **he** refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:8 mwc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς 1 Stephen’s listeners would have known that this **covenant** required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:8 g67f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7:8 ams1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7:8 gaww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word **patriarchs** to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:9 n981 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ πατριάρχαι 1 Here the word **patriarchs** refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
7:9 tik7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:9 w1is rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 When Stephen says that God **was with** Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:10 kxgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 1 In these phrases the word **he** refers to God and the words **him** and **his** refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:10 bfoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **favor** and **wisdom** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:10 vpir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 Here the phrase **before Pharaoh** may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:10 s5vk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 The phrase **before Pharaoh** could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:10 nycs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 In these phrases the words **he** and **his** refer to Pharaoh and the word **him** refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:10 yr7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:10 pb4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 The word **household** refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:11 p42j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἦλθεν & λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 Here, Stephen speaks of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
7:11 frd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:11 p37v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:12 pia8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:12 cvhm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον 1 By **first**, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:12 mbg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:13 a5f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **second** as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds **time** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7:13 ce2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
7:13 m37e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:13 jxk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ 1 The phrase **became known** is not actually a passive form in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:14 aam5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀποστείλας & Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ 1 Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
7:14 wl32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε 1 Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:15 zasp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 Stephen says that Jacob **went down** because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:15 w2sm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they **died** as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:15 fe56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:16 slg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:16 la8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τιμῆς ἀργυρίου 1 Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:17 tuq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
7:17 kh8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Stephen is speaking of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
7:17 tlh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Stephen is referring to **the promise** that he described in [7:7](../07/07.md). God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:17 s2oe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 Stephen is using the two words **increased** and **multiplied** together to express a single idea. The word **multiplied** tells in what way the people **increased**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
7:18 whe7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 When Stephen says that this next king **arose**, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:18 g2wq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:18 e2y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ 1 Stephen is not saying that this king **did not know Joseph** personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, **Joseph** refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:19 qwbi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **He** refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:19 z312 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:19 ug6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
7:19 rh3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **exposed** he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:19 n2vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι 1 Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **keep alive**, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
7:20 nib6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ 1 Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
7:20 q66s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Stephen introduces **Moses** into his story. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
7:20 cz9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:20 cd5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ 1 This could mean: (1) that Moses was **beautiful** in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very **beautiful**. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:20 pnb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνετράφη & ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:21 w3iu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ 1 Moses **was exposed** because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:21 el3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν 1 This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus [2:1–10](../exo/02/01.md).) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:22 c9nw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:22 att9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 Stephen says **all** as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7:22 m3dm δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
7:23 o4cg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:23 b9gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:23 ckxj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The expression **it came up on his heart** means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:23 fj9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:23 x493 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:23 i4ko rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 Although the terms **brothers** and **sons** are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
7:24 l4zv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was **the Egyptian** who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:24 y3yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:24 r2e8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit **the Egyptian** so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:25 hrsh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:25 f6sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:25 nhb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:26 t2vc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτοῖς 1 It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:26 qyc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὺς & ἐστε & ἀδικεῖτε 1 Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of **them** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
7:26 mpc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:26 kyde rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:26 zzt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:26 z5g2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Moses is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:26 k1ku rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:27 xef7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The word **him** refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:27 iq30 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:27 q2r4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:27 wtq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν 1 In this context, the words **ruler** and **judge** mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:27 t1hw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The man is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7:28 vow8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **do you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
7:28 hk1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:28 qfxh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:28 jxka ὃν τρόπον 1 Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
7:29 l149 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔφυγεν & Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:29 rbhm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 Stephen is using the term **word** to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:29 q8qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:30 zx1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:30 qci0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:30 veft rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος 1 The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:30 f7yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:31 q6w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses **admired the sight** because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:31 uk7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου 1 Stephen is speaking of **the voice of the Lord** as if it were a person and that it **came** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
7:32 b26o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:33 bpml rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν & αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:33 x7cd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7:33 rxnj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:33 xl9p τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **sandals**. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
7:33 clk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made **holy** by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:34 l0au rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:34 yz7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb **seen** is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:34 x5bg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 God uses the possessive word **my** to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
7:34 j32c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς 1 God describes himself as having **come down** from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means that he is taking action to **rescue** them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:34 atdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 God is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
7:34 sq8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative νῦν δεῦρο 1 God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
7:34 x34c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says **let me send you to Egypt**. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
7:35-38 x4p2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν 1 Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says **This Moses**, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
7:35 nv5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:35 vuqy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 See how you translated this rhetorical question in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:35 oic6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν 1 See how you translated the combination of **ruler** and **judge** in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:35 vp7e λυτρωτὴν 1 In this context, the word translated **redeemer** refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”
7:35 yjz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου 1 Here, **hand** is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:35 abc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ 1 See how you translated the word **appeared** in [7:30](../07/30.md). Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:36 gz9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:36 n75x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ 1 Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, **the Red Sea**, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7:37 k710 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:37 vykp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ 1 Stephen is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:37 b4sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει & ὡς ἐμέ 1 Here, the expression **raise up** describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:37 j2rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:38 fd25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος 1 **This is the one** refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:38 z1z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 It might be more natural to put the information about **Mount Sinai** next to the information about Moses receiving **living words**. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
7:38 vdnz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο 1 This second instance of **who** in the verse refers to Moses, not to the **fathers**. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:38 y2zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the **words** that he **received.** Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:38 p3xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγια ζῶντα 1 Stephen is using the term **words** to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:38 w2gs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λόγια ζῶντα 1 Stephen is using the term **living** to describe God’s **words** as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:39 ab0s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The word **whom** refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:39 mvz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπώσαντο 1 Stephen is speaking to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:39 z3ze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:40 l8u7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:40 kb3o εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”
7:40 a68q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ 1 It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
7:41 ux1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this **image of a calf** was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as **the idol** later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:41 v6tx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:41 hjp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:41 hh77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 Stephen describes what he also calls the **calf** and the **idol** as **the works of their hands** by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:42 d3dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς 1 Stephen is speaking as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:42 u7lx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 Here, the word **host** means “army,” and the word **heaven** means “sky.” Stephen is speaking of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:42 ya6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:42 f314 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:42 w38i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
7:42 o5ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
7:42 gd1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of **Israel** that they did not really worship Him **in the wilderness** with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:42 q9rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular μὴ & προσηνέγκατέ 1 **You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you could use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
7:42 tck0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism σφάγια καὶ θυσίας 1 In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (**slain beasts**) and those that are bloodless (**offerings**), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
7:42 j4q8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:43 zek5 καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. 1 The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
7:43 h20h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 **And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../07/42.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me … , did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
7:43 q85n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἀνελάβετε & μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
7:43 gxh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀνελάβετε & ὑμῶν & ἐποιήσατε & ὑμᾶς 1 As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you could use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
7:43 im7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ 1 The **tabernacle of Molech** was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:43 cq47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν 1 The Israelites were not carrying around an actual **star**, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:43 gm4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε 1 The word **images** refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:43 zgq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated **and** to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
7:43 rrn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
7:44 fs4q Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nStephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md).
7:44 hfmx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen is not saying that the **tabernacle** was **with** the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built **according to the pattern** that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7:44 m9gw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου 1 Stephen calls this tent the **tabernacle of the testimony** by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:44 fk06 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
7:44 masq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:44 avqh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the **pattern** for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:45 uqca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **which** refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
7:45 qjov διαδεξάμενοι 1 The phrase **having received … in turn** translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
7:45 n2sc εἰσήγαγον & μετὰ Ἰησοῦ 1 When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle **with Joshua**, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
7:45 e3gu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσήγαγον 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:45 eww5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Stephen is using the term **nations** to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:45 spm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 Stephen is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:45 zjlj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7:45 wot8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:46 k9vh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:46 x4kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
7:46 ykio rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:46 yl80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:46 w3cu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκήνωμα 1 The word **dwelling** refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:46 in7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Some ancient manuscripts read “the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
7:46 fsmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Jacob** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:47 k54c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 Stephen is using the word **house** to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:47 dlk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:48 wuce rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ὁ Ὕψιστος 1 This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7:48 fwvu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj χειροποιήτοις 1 Stephen is using the adjective **made with hands** (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds **houses** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7:48 c822 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7:48 ota0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χειροποιήτοις 1 The word **houses** means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:48 d4fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **the prophet**, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:49 oyax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
7:49 k2vn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Speaking through Isaiah, God describes **Heaven** as his **throne** and **the earth** as his **footstool**. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:49 i4u3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 God is using the two parts of creation, **Heaven** and **earth**, to mean all of creation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
7:49 wc9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:49 rqr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7:49 mshp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποῖον οἶκον 1 The word **house** means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:49 vjaq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:50 hqjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
7:50 rfk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:50 jlg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7:50 gzw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:51 umq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using the exclamatory word **O** to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative **O**. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
7:51 yxe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **stiff-necked** as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7:51 vn7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκληροτράχηλοι 1 Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:51 zp55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen speaks of the Sanhedrin members’ **heart and ears** as **uncircumcised** by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:51 esfc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7:51 jslb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7:51 zgon rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε 1 The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7:51 w164 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμεῖς 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
7:51 d2v8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7:52 x7kf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:52 eiw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7:52 q8wb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῦ Δικαίου 1 Stephen is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds **One** to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7:52 agd9 οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”
7:53 axhl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:53 t92q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7:53 euw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in [7:38](../07/38.md) that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:54 ef2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀκούοντες & ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:54 u4l7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:54 ae9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7:55 dlux rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:55 ntp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν 1 The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:55 bl2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:55 zpry rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7:55 vamz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:55 vyz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” **at the right of God**. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7:56 gzvv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Stephen is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:56 p0jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ 1 Stephen is speaking of **the heavens** being **opened** to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:56 aqp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:56 imoa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated the nominal adjective **right** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7:56 cr19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase **at the right of God** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:56 rvwp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus **standing** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “the Son of Man, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7:57 p4cg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν 1 The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7:57 wtwk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:57 hm0q κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
7:57 t287 ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
7:58 ks1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 Luke is likely speaking when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members **throwing** Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:58 teas rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ μάρτυρες 1 These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in [6:13](../06/13.md). According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:58 ryrh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου 1 The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:58 wy7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὰ ἱμάτια 1 These **outer garments** were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
7:58 sx2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 The expression **at the feet** means on the ground in front of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:59 fxhz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **calling out** tells how Stephen was **saying** what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
7:59 k2el rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
7:60 u86q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction θεὶς & τὰ γόνατα 1 Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7:60 hi24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:60 dfjs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
7:60 tvf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold … against**. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
7:60 r9vi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says **he fell asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
8:intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32–33.\n\nThe first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in Chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Receiving the Holy Spirit\n\nIn this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15–19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.\n\n### Proclaimed\n\nThis chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
8:1 ez88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ 1 Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8:1 i1tc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:1 vc8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Here, **day** is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:1 xp25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντες & διεσπάρησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:1 u5pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες & διεσπάρησαν 1 The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8:1 k5a2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 The implication is that **the apostles** remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:1-2 tp9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 It may be helpful to your readers to move the parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1–2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
8:2 sjc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον 1 The word translated **carried away** means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:3 yd2i κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους 1 Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
8:3 w6vk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:4 n52l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ & διασπαρέντες 1 Luke is using the participle **having been scattered**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8:4 ymy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & διασπαρέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. See how you translated it in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:4 su6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in [4:4](../04/04.md). Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated **proclaiming** here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:5 gz5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατελθὼν 1 Luke speaks of Philip **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:5 f45b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:5 pk1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν Χριστόν 1 Luke is using the name **Christ** by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:6 cnt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ὄχλοι 1 Luke implicitly means **the crowds** in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:6 jyvw ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 Alternate translation: “all together”
8:6 tt0i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου 1 Luke is using the participle **being spoken**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8:6 g0ft rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:6 wm83 τὰ σημεῖα 1 Here the word **signs** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”
8:7 un6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο 1 As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had **unclean spirits** being the subject of the sentence to the **unclean spirits** themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people to such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
8:7 pehe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν ἐχόντων 1 Luke is using the participle **having**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **those** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8:7 xb2n ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα 1 Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
8:7 nz7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:7 v8uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:7 imbh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι 1 Luke is using the participle **paralyzed** as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8:7 anq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:8 s8bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8:8 z5z3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 The phrase **that city** refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:8 r0nz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:9 jm7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων 1 Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8:9 bed1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἀνὴρ & τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
8:9 cx7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σίμων 1 **Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8:10 mvcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:10 evt7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8:10 h51l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 Luke is using the adjectives **little** and **great** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8:10 ibl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
8:10 h5ya rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 The demonstrative pronoun **This** stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:10 j3d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8:10 yw5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ καλουμένη 1 If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:11 pxj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ 1 This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8:12 h1hg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπίστευσαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:12 zwoj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:12 zjh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title **Christ** indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:12 jg1w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Since Jesus inaugurated the **kingdom of God** when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
8:12 vsy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:13 k2th rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν 1 Luke uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
8:13 bayg ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ 1 Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”
8:13 v91t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαπτισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:13 rnr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας 1 The word that ULT translates as **works** here is the same word that it translates as “power” in [8:10](../08/10.md). It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that **works** of power that are truly **great** are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
8:13 d4yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις 1 The terms **signs** and **works** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:14 s7lr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:14 lk9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
8:14 uwxo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
8:14 ju21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ Σαμάρεια 1 Luke is using the word **Samaria** by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:14 e682 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:15 af1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **who** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:15 hd1w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual οἵτινες 1 Since the pronoun **who** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
8:15 hk1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καταβάντες 1 Luke speaks of Philip **having come down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:15 bun9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go καταβάντες 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
8:16 d2z9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:16 l4ez rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8:16 qmjp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
8:16 bpzz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐδέπω & ἦν & ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 The pronoun **he** stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:16 rn3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of the Lord Jesus** represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:16 m1nw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:17 bsll rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον 1 The first instance of the pronoun **they** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** and the second instance of **they** stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:17 bldf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual ἐπετίθεσαν 1 Since this instance of the pronoun **they** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in [8:18](../08/18.md) and “they” and “the ones” in [8:25](../08/25.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
8:17 q7gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Peter and John **laying their hands** on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
8:18 rh79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:19 fbw9 δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον 1 Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
8:20 df1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
8:20 y4ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριόν 1 Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:20 gh12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Peter is referring to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it **the gift of God**. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:21 p2ev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 The terms **part** and **share** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:21 ufk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession σοι 1 The phrase **to you** represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
8:21 xbh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:21 p9v4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) that Simon’s **heart** is not **right** in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:22 sa6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wickedness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:22 ppk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:22 pe2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Peter is using the conditional word **if** to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
8:22 lq4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:23 tf3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας 1 The **gall** plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:23 kpu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας 1 Peter is using the **gall** plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:23 d3v7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας 1 Peter is describing **bitterness** as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:23 j696 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας 1 Peter speaks of **the bond of unrighteousness** as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:24 n5cw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual ὑμεῖς & εἰρήκατε 1 Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as [8:18](../08/18.md) describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, **You** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
8:24 v2wy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
8:24 hwc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Simon is stating the pronoun **You**, which is already implied in the verb **pray**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:24 u1a4 ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
8:24 sk5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:25 nzvg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential οὖν 1 Luke is using the word translated **Then** to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
8:25 p3rj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 The **ones** Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:25 uz15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες 1 Luke is using the participles **having testified** and **having spoken**, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8:25 ww9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:25 eu66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν 1 The term **villages** refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:26 mbj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:26 w1nk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνάστηθι 1 Here the word **arise** means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:26 le2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν 1 The angel speaks of the road **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:26 a18y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος 1 This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8:27 s0yn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη 1 As in the previous verse, the word **arising** means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:27 xy7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἰδοὺ 1 Luke is using the word **behold** to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
8:27 zkc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8:27 i5zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ 1 This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:27 s1uf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης 1 While the word **eunuch** describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:27 t5t1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κανδάκης 1 **Kandake** was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8:27 nm48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς 1 Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was **over** the **treasure** of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:27 v8q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:27 uk32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ὃς ἐληλύθει 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
8:28 d3kv rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τοῦ ἅρματος 1 Here and in [8:29](../08/29.md) and [8:38](../08/38.md), the term **chariot** probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:28 bx2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν 1 Luke is using the phrase **the prophet Isaiah** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:28 n40c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνεγίνωσκεν 1 Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as [8:30](../08/30.md) explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:29 llh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ 1 The Spirit means that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the **chariot**. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:30 ffh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην 1 Luke is using the phrase **Isaiah the prophet** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:30 x98i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις 1 The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:31 r5g2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με? 1 The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8:31 zx9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρεκάλεσέν & τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ 1 The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:32 nd93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη 1 This a quotation from Isaiah [53:7–8](../isa/53/07.md). It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:32 bgk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slaughter**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:32 kh97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἤχθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:32 lu3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος 1 A **shearer** is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:32 k8sy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 This means that the Messiah does not speak by association with the way a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:33 dwur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **humiliation** and **justice**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:33 y2a1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:33 k3uz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8:33 ec09 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
8:33 yxxn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generation**, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:33 idk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:34 agq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
8:34 htb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δέομαί σου 1 The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:34 pa3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἑτέρου τινός 1 In this context, the pronoun **other** means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:35 j7xw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνοίξας & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 By association with the way a person would be **opening his mouth** in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:35 uw21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης 1 By **this scripture**, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:35 xg4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Luke is using the name **Jesus** by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:36 ip13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τι ὕδωρ & ὕδωρ 1 Luke and the official are using the word **water** to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:36 muz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι? 1 This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in [8:37](../08/37.md) by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8:36 wb9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive με βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:37 ov75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
8:37 qj5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:37 djq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:37 e3uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
8:38 l8wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα 1 Luke is using the term **chariot** by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:38 nn00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** stands for Philip, and the pronoun **him** stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8:39 xp52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential γὰρ 1 While the word translated **for** often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip anymore because he did not look for him but instead **went on his way**. Rather, the word **for** seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
8:40 r1x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:40 bbws rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:40 arh5 διερχόμενος 1 Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
8:40 zfn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8:40 yf7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἄζωτον & Καισάρειαν 1 **Azotus** and **Caesarea** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:intro jm6x 0 # Acts 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nIn [9:1](../09/01.md), the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation.\n\nIn [9:32](../09/32.md), the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.\n\nActs [9:31](../09/31.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”\n\nThe “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.\n\n### “The Way”\n\nNo one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community.\n\n### “the church”\n\nActs 9:31 is the first use of the word **church** in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “the Lord”\n\nLuke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### What Saul saw when he met Jesus\n\nIt is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
9:1 r4n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **But** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:1 anb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς 1 Luke is using the two words **threat** and **murder** together to express a single idea. The word **murder** tells what kind of **threat** Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
9:1 lrre rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐμπνέων 1 Luke is using the term **breathing** by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:2 wyfp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & εὕρῃ & ἀγάγῃ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun **he** refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:2 zu6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐπιστολὰς 1 See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these **letters** were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:2 v9lw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 Luke is using the terms **Damascus** and **synagogues** by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:2 thuy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας 1 As the General Notes to this chapter explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:2 mma1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:2 grch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:2 a6z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:3 jf4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν & τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:3 by55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 Luke uses the phrase **it happened that** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:3 dm6c αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”
9:3 gua8 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
9:4 y4u4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:4 c9l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:5 jaq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε? 1 Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is **Lord**. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
9:5 abc0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἶπεν & ὁ 1 The first instance of **he** stands for Saul, and the second instance of **he** stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:5 q8ge εἶ & σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** here are singular.
9:6 fbi6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λαληθήσεταί σοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:8 puw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένων & τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:8 dgg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰσήγαγον 1 The pronoun **they** stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in [9:8](../09/08.md). Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:9 fhn6 ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων 1 Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
9:9 t8uc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν 1 This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. [9:11](../09/11.md) says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:10 j847 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας 1 Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
9:10 kgn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 **Ananias** is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in [5:1](../05/01.md) (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:10 vqh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **the Lord** is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
9:10 vl8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 **Behold, I** is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:10 u3e1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:11 mn24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 Here, the word **arising** means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:11 kopv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:11 pyr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 **Straight** is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:11 ie1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰούδα 1 **Judas** it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in [1:13](../01/13.md), [1:16](../01/16.md), and [5:37](../05/37.md) for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:11 k3ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται 1 The Lord says **behold** to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:12 jk46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας 1 In this culture, **laying hands on** people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in [6:6](../06/06.md) for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:13 quxn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ πολλῶν 1 Ananias is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
9:13 sh2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅσα κακὰ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evils**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:13 la9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Ananias is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:14 ptd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:14 gk5o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:14 hi6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Ananias is using the participle **calling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
9:14 t3fl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:14 ampz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, the expression **calling on** means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:15 jmt7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι 1 The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an **instrument** who is characterized by his **choosing**. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
9:15 gk29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:15 ndxu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι 1 The Lord describes Saul as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:15 z5fj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 The Lord says that Saul will **carry** his **name**, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:15 h8vw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:15 wh8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐθνῶν 1 The term **nations** refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in [4:25](../04/25.md). Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:15 bbfd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche βασιλέων 1 The Lord is using **kings**, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:15 uq9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor υἱῶν & Ἰσραήλ 1 The Lord is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:16 kty3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:17 s8ms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 It may be helpful to state that **Ananias** went to **the house** before he **entered into** it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:17 my6m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 When Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at [9:2](../09/02.md) and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:17 q61x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σοι & ἤρχου & ἀναβλέψῃς 1 All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
9:17 cah9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 **Brother** is a figurative title that Ananias is using for **Saul**. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in [1:15](../01/15.md) and [6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:17 cxu4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὁ ὀφθείς σοι 1 Ananias is using the participle **having appeared**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
9:17 ptg0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ᾗ ἤρχου 1 Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
9:17 a89q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use the passive form **filled**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:17 x4ey rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Ananias is speaking as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:18 m1hx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown λεπίδες 1 It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the **scales** that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:18 efs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:19 rxfi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνισχύθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:20 rc49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The personal pronoun **he** refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
9:20 w65r rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
9:21 xid8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες 1 Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9:21 a8j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ ἀκούοντες & ὁ πορθήσας & τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους 1 Luke is using the participles **hearing**, **having destroyed**, and **calling on**, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms **ones** and **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
9:21 f4fd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο, καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς? 1 The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers in Jerusalem and had come to Damascus to arrest the believers there. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name! And he come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:21 ctg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 By **this name** the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:21 l82i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:21 zuoi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, **calling on** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:21 i512 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:21 pnrp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:22 r1np rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός 1 Saul was not intentionally **stirring up the Jews**. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:23 cg9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 As in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [7:23](../07/23.md), this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:23 nyh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:23 g74c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:23 g6gw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:24 gnm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of **But** in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
9:24 lv62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:24 cy9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρετηροῦντο & τὰς πύλας & ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν 1 The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:24 b0gv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς πύλας 1 Luke is using **the gates** to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:24 aezc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
9:25 lc8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 These **disciples** were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:26 e38m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν 1 Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9:27 abca rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns Βαρναβᾶς & ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ & ἐπαρρησιάσατο 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:27 n9f1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Saul **had spoken boldly** with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:28 cgb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:28 m5rs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Saul. The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:28 r6ok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος 1 This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:28 fbb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [9:27](../09/27.md). Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:29 d7lm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἑλληνιστάς 1 **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
9:29 lgqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν 1 The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:30 uz9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:30 j4mt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 Luke uses the phrase **brought him down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:30 aqn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably **sent** Saul **to Tarsus** by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:31 fh2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἶχεν εἰρήνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:31 elq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could state “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:31 vx51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἰκοδομουμένη 1 Luke is speaking of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:31 j8c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **journeying** means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:31 z59s πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord”
9:31 hl24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Luke is using the possessive form to describe **the Holy Spirit** as the one who was giving the church **encouragement**. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
9:32 w68g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:32 m9sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole διὰ πάντων 1 Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9:32 ad7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατελθεῖν 1 Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:32 tckc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα 1 Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:32 g5c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λύδδα 1 **Lydda** is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:33 hzd7 εὗρεν & ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα 1 The word **found** does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
9:33 jnc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν 1 Luke uses this sentence to introduce **Aeneas** as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
9:33 owf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Αἰνέαν 1 **Aeneas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:33 uj5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
9:33 k7hw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 The reason why Aeneas had been **lying in a bed for eight years** was that he **was paralyzed**. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:34 t13n ἀνάστηθι 1 **Arise** in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.
9:34 ff2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 Peter says **for yourself** to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you could make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
9:34 khrm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:35 wykn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Aeneas. The pronoun **who** refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9:35 z3fp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9:35 qkv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 **Sharon** is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:35 pf23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:35 x9yw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 Here, **turned to the Lord** means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:36 zgq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δέ 1 Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:36 gwr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς 1 **Tabitha** was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and **Dorcas** was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:36 z8la rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λέγεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:36 q2rn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν 1 Luke speaks of **Dorcas** as if she were a container that was **full** of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:37 mg72 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 The phrase **in those days** refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:37 y8sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λούσαντες & αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν 1 This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:37 znj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ 1 This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:37 lbrl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large, sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:38 qlp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
9:38 pukn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual παρακαλοῦντες 1 Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, **urging** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
9:39 k1se rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς & Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:39 tdrr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual αὐτοῖς 1 This first instance of **them** in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of **them** would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
9:39 me79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι 1 Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9:39 piu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς 1 It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these **coats and garments** to help these **widows** because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:39 y6q5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα 1 This may be a delicate way of speaking about Dorcas’s death, rather than saying “before she died.” Alternate translation, as in UST: “while she was still alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
9:40 yp2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα 1 Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:40 wr7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah restores you to life, so you can get up now” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
9:40 k28m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:41 r7n6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δοὺς & αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν 1 The implication is that Peter extended his **hand** to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:41 b73s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας 1 These **saints** and **widows** were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
9:41 ex8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Luke is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:42 nda9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:43 k9ik rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:43 qar2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 A **tanner** is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- Verses 1–2 give background information about Cornelius. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence at the start of v. 2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n\n- In verse 9, the story shifts away from Cornelius and tells how God prepared Peter to preach the gospel to the Gentiles.\n- In verse 24, the story brings Peter and Cornelius together.\n\n- The long sentence in verses 36–38 can be broken up into several sentences, as in the UST.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Jews visiting with Gentiles\n\nThe Jews believed that they would become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against this, wanting to keep Jews from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that Jewish people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Baptism and the Holy Spirit\n\nThose who were listening to Peter received the Holy Spirit even as he was speaking to them. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could believe the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
10:1 wtb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
10:1 h6zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κορνήλιος 1 **Cornelius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
10:1 x476 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἑκατοντάρχης 1 A **centurion** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:1 abcd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:1 h2a4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown Σπείρης 1 A **regiment** was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your language that you can use for a unit of about this size. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:1 e88y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰταλικῆς 1 **Italian** is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
10:2 s6rh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 The word **devout** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10:2 rz4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel, attended the synagogue, prayed at regular times, and supported the needs of the Jewish community. Luke may be using the expression in this way and assuming that his readers will recognize it. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:2 abce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that **the people** refers to Jewish people who were in need. Alternate translation: “to Jewish people in need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:2 imrx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” See how you translated it in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “always” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
10:2 w2kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all**, meaning “at all times,” is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “often” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:3 up3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during his afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:3 ttsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:3 z5ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
10:4 abcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **he** stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun **him** stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:4 bd2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τί ἐστιν, κύριε 1 Cornelius uses the respectful title **lord** because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in [9:5](../09/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
10:4 abcg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **he** stands for the angel, and the pronoun **him** stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:4 p5ml rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 A **memorial offering** was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:4 xpa1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **before** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:5 h33i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:6 hou9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ξενίζεται παρά 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:6 bw0q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 See how you translated the term **tanner** in [9:43](../09/43.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”
10:7 yg7g εὐσεβῆ 1 The adjective **devout** describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”
10:8 pcg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἅπαντα 1 By **everything**, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:9 ey9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων 1 The demonstrative pronoun **those** refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:9 tu7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:9 r6l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
10:10 im7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις 1 Luke speaks of this **vision** as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
10:11 n4hi θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw”
10:11 u9u4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form **opened**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:11 jh1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθιέμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:12 fdt3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντα τὰ 1 The word **all** is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:12 ua3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 From Peter’s response in [10:14](../10/14.md), the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:13 a2z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Luke speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
10:13 zmeg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:14 z7r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μηδαμῶς 1 **Not at all** is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
10:14 ewlu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of word **never** and the negative terms **common** and **unclean**. Alternate translation: “I have only ever eaten things that are holy and clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
10:14 p0bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10:14 a2jj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “common and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:15 as42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification φωνὴ πάλιν & πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The implied verb here is **came**, and so Luke is speaking once again of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
10:15 xs5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
10:15 st9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:16 rlr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:16 ej9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:17 d4zi ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν 1 Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”
10:17 n6da rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:17 cg9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κορνηλίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Cornelius had sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:17 e62m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα 1 The implication is that the house of Simon the tanner had a wall around it and that there was a **gate** in the wall that people could use to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:18 qe9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:18 r91o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:19 iqx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 The Spirit is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:19 va39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
10:20 ndju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:20 ym1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατάβηθι 1 The implication is that Peter is to **go down** from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:20 wx4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:20 j3iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲν διακρινόμενος 1 This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “without worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:22 rva1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes οἱ & εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10:22 i4zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & εἶπαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:22 ue5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ & εἶπαν 1 One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
10:22 wvl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 The word **righteous** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10:22 hrta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:22 hihl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:22 gv91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke says **whole** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:22 e15o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The messengers are using the term **words** to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:23 shs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν 1 The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:23 ycoi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:23 t7cz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:24 c3s6 τῇ & ἐπαύριον 1 The **next day** means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
10:25 b4pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Cornelius did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
10:26 s7n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι 1 Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
10:27 f9x6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun **he** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:27 kdva rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εὑρίσκει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:27 twp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:28 iyx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:28 k3we rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 Here, the term **foreigner** refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:28 ztt0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
10:28 tl2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10:29 x0p4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεταπεμφθείς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:29 x0v3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular μετεπέμψασθέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
10:30 mqv8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου 1 Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
10:30 na4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας 1 In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or **Four days ago**. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:30 pkhh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ταύτης τῆς ὥρας 1 Cornelius is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:30 x4m7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐνάτην 1 Cornelius is using the adjective **ninth** as a noun. ULT adds **hour** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
10:30 u1es rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:30 p73u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
10:30 yy6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἐνάτην 1 This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:30 oicx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ 1 Cornelius is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this **man** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:30 g485 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνὴρ 1 Luke says in [10:3](../10/03.md) that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him **a man** here because the angel appeared to him in human form. you could state that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:31 twnu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])Q
10:31 uep3 φησί 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
10:31 heh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:31 s6nz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The word **remembered** does not imply that God had forgotten about these **alms**. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:31 xd0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐνώπιον 1 Here the word **before** is being used. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:32 jjnn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10:32 ci31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:32 u1t6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὗτος ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:32 jhzt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα & παρὰ θάλασσαν 1 Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
10:33 p5ee rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σέ & σύ & σοι 1 The word **you** is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
10:33 ruf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος 1 This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
10:33 lzie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Cornelius is using the word **we** to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
10:33 ry21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Cornelius is using the word **before**. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:33 xt4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:33 jc88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by the Lord.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
10:34 cyn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἀνοίξας & Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν 1 It might seem that the expression **opening his mouth … said** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
10:34 iii7 προσωπολήμπτης 1 Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”
10:34 ha31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός 1 As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:35 b5cr ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 Here, **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”
10:35 j78e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10:36 aac8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this **word**; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state “You know the word” in this verse as well. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:36 ht1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:36 anlh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Peter is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:36 ok9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10:36 md1l πάντων 1 The word **all** could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”
10:37 wecw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ & ῥῆμα 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:37 ch65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:37 sq2i μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης 1 Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and then baptized them”
10:38 seli rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
10:38 p2qi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:38 ku82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει 1 Peter speaks of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:38 vuwo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εὐεργετῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10:38 y5ya rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:38 tj3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 The expression **was with him** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [7:9](../07/09.md). Alternate translation: “God was helping him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:39 kal7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες 1 Here, **we** refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
10:39 sx3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν 1 The pronoun **whom** refers to Jesus, and the pronoun **they** refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who conspired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:39 z4dt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says **tree** to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:40 zxuk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:40 cxj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 Here, **raised … up** is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:40 w8kv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:40 iz8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:41 nm81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you could adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:41 jq89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 By **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:41 zpyj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:41 xlbl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ 1 Peter is using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
10:41 q7d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
10:42 ik96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
10:42 zne5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBy **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:42 c1ak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:42 ws4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν 1 Peter is using the adjectives **living** and **dead** as nouns. (The word **living** is actually a participle, but it functions here as an adjective.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
10:43 ub5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:43 y6d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 Peter is speaking of the **name** of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:44 cz7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/16.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
10:44 wf7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also **listening** to his message, the word **all** refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:44 o839 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:45 j6wt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ & πιστοὶ 1 Luke is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
10:45 qlpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify these **faithful** people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:45 g161 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:45 mqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκέχυται 1 Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:45 hfs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Luke is using a possessive form to identify **the Holy Spirit** as a **gift** from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
10:45 f33n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **also** refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:46 p6pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλούντων γλώσσαις 1 The implication is that at least some of these **languages** were ones that the Jews recognized and could understand, but which Cornelius and his guests had not learned. This caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Holy Spirit was giving them the ability to speak these languages. Alternate translation: “speaking in languages they had not learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:47 zktm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **is he**. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
10:47 u5d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10:47 vuax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb **withhold** and the negative particle **not**. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
10:47 df24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὸ ὕδωρ 1 Peter is using **water**, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
10:47 kwv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:48 l8ci rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι 1 The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:48 z4fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:48 ax6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 1 Here, **in the name** is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in [10:43](../10/43.md). See how you translated the similar expression in [2:48](../02/48.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”\n\nAlmost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “the Lord”\n\nIn verse 16, Peter refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Luke refers to Jesus the same way in the second instance of the phrase in verse 21 and in verses 23 and 24. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Peter’s summary of his visit to Cornelius\n\nIn Acts 11:5–17, Peter summarizes the events that are described in greater detail in 10:9–47. Very similar language is used throughout both passages. As you translate 11:5–17, in order to ensure that your translation is consistent, compare how you translated specific terms and phrases in 10:9–47.
11:1 ab75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
11:1 f1md rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ 2 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:1 w3rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter, by using words, shared with Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:2 kb4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:2 yar6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 As in [10:45](../10/45.md), Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely to have been strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:3 pcce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς. 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
11:3 zmou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς 1 This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these **men**. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:3 ah7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας 1 The phrase **men having foreskins** refers to men who are not Jewish. It is a crude and dismissive expression, and it shows that these Jewish believers still regarded Gentiles with disdain. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised men” or “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:4 aakb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἀρξάμενος & Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς 1 Luke is using the word **beginning** to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
11:5 dtt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθιεμένην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:6 lbh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 From Peter’s response in [11:8](../11/08.md), the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. See how you translated this in [10:12](../10/12.md). Alternate translation: “ … and the birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:7 gm0m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 Peter speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
11:7 ag7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:7 t1mg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λεγούσης μοι, ἀναστάς, Πέτρε, θῦσον καὶ φάγε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling me to arise and kill and eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
11:8 p8vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, μηδαμῶς, Κύριε, ὅτι κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I told the Lord that I would certainly not do that, since the common or unclean had never entered my mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
11:8 m4mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μηδαμῶς 1 **By no means** is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. See how you translated this in [10:14](../10/14.md). Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
11:8 nbju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “food that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
11:8 m5p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the common or unclean, like some of those animals, has never entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:8 wwbw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the word **never** and the negative terms **common** and **unclean**. Alternate translation: “only what is holy and clean has ever entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
11:8 j0rv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Peter is using one part of the eating process to represent the entire process. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “I have never eaten anything that is common or unclean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11:9 at0t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “from heaven and told me that I must not make common what God had cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
11:9 b24j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
11:9 txbl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:10 xrq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in [10:16](../10/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:10 s2ik rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνεσπάσθη & ἅπαντα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling everything up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:11 ias8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἦμεν 1 The term **we** refers to Peter and the others in the house in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
11:11 b2qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἐξαυτῆς 1 Peter is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on how soon after his vision ended these **three men** arrived. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “right then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:11 k44j ἐξαυτῆς 1 Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”
11:11 qwn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:12 lf6m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲν διακρίναντα 1 This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” See how you translated this in [10:20](../10/20.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:12 xrc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “these six fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:12 w6ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 Peter implicitly means the **house** of Cornelius. Alternate translation: “the house of the man who had sent the messengers to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:13 mwzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 The term **us** refers to Peter and the believers who came with him to Caesarea. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
11:13 few6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the same phrase in [10:32](../10/32.md). Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:14 rwpw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The angel is using the term **words** to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:14 fnjz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σὲ & σωθήσῃ σὺ & σου 1 All the instances of the words **you** and **your** in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
11:14 p3gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:14 hpr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:15 a8jw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν 1 Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
11:15 ak2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/16.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit, just as we did in the beginning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:15 qdon rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:15 qy12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
11:15 th4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 By **in the beginning**, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:16 xd9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:16 ett3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
11:16 wwnl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to Chapter 1, and see how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:16 v116 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:17 pe42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
11:17 y7ag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν 1 Peter is referring to the **gift** of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the gift of the Holy Spirit, just as he did to us when we believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:17 u3nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 Peter is using the question form to convince his listeners that God wanted him to accept the Gentile believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
11:17 xpsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 For emphasis, Peter is adding the pronoun **I**, which is not required with the verb. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with verbs but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:17 ot1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 It may be helpful to indicate in what way Peter thought he might be able to **hinder** God. Alternate translation: “to hinder God by refusing to welcome and baptize people to whom he had given his own Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:18 xlpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἡσύχασαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter was speaking. Alternate translation: “the Jewish believers became quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:18 nr7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡσύχασαν 1 This is an idiom that means they no longer argued. Alternate translation: “they no longer argued with Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:18 z3fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **repentance** and **life**, you could express the same idea in other ways. Here the term **life** refers to everlasting life. Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles as well to repent and live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:19 bwb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent οὖν 1 Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
11:19 whm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the **persecution** that Luke describes in [8:1](../08/01.md), which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:19 w3wq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φοινίκης 1 The word **Phoenicia** is the name of a region. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11:19 ig50 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κύπρου 1 The word ** Cyprus** is the name of an island. See how you translated it in [4:36](../04/36.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11:19 zbml rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:19 c8ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions μηδενὶ λαλοῦντες τὸν λόγον εἰ μὴ μόνον Ἰουδαίοις 1 Since Luke says here that the scattered believers spoke about Jesus **only to Jews**, but he says in the next verse that some of them spoke to “Greeks” (that is, Gentiles), it might appear in your language that Luke was contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Most of them believed they should speak the message about Jesus only to Jews, so that is what they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
11:20 ogva rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Κύπριοι καὶ Κυρηναῖοι 1 Luke is describing these **men** in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “Cypriot and Cyrenian men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:20 k6si rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κύπριοι 1 The word **Cypriots** is the name for people who come from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11:20 tz12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κυρηναῖοι 1 The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people who come from the city of Cyrene. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11:20 mww9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that these people he calls **Greeks** were not necessarily from Greece; rather, they were Greek-speaking people who were also Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:21 ebxq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness χεὶρ Κυρίου 1 In this instance, Luke seems to mean God the Father when he says **the Lord**. In [4:29–30](../04/29.md), the believers pray, “Lord … stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen through the name of your holy Servant Jesus.” Luke seems to be describing these events as part of the answer to that prayer. Alternate translation: “the hand of God the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
11:21 aj5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χεὶρ 1 Here, the **hand** represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:21 bfm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦν & μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 When Luke says that God **was with** the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:21 n9pq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 Luke speaks of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically **turned to the Lord**. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:21 qcn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
11:22 i7vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἠκούσθη & ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 In your language, the expression **was heard in the ears** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
11:22 kcb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “The church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:22 rdhr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:22 oa8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν & ἐξαπέστειλαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:23 b7w7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how gracious God had been to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:23 bz6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας 1 Here the **heart** represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:24 b9a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Barnabas encouraged the new believers in Antioch so well. Alternate translation: “He was able to do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
11:24 he5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως 1 Luke speaks of Barnabas as if he were a container that was **full** of the **Holy Spirit** and of **faith**. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who had strong faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:24 m7yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who believed firmly in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:24 e35e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God added a considerable crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:24 e57t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke says **the Lord** (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:25 yhl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:26 qzml rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:26 z36c ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year”
11:26 w4dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτοῖς & συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:26 x8gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χρηματίσαι & πρώτως & τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people first called the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:26 w0sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Χριστιανούς 1 The word **Christians** is a name for people who believe that Jesus is the Christ, that is, the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11:26 r6sl πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”
11:27 h6zw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
11:27 kep8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ταύταις & ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Luke is using the word **days** to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:27 d8bb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that these prophets **came down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:28 q3tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 Here, **having arisen** means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
11:28 w18f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 The term **whole** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11:28 pd2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **world**, he means the part of the world that they were familiar with. Alternate translation: “the … Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:28 jmc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 The expression **upon Claudius** refers to the time during the reign of Claudius. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11:28 fjyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 The word **Claudius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11:29 rk9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν & μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν & πέμψαι 1 The implication is that while some of the disciples were **prospering** greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:29 up7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς & ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:30 taw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **elders** who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:30 l8i8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 Here, the **hand**, one part of a person, represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take it to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11:30 rq2w διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 If you retain the figurative word **hand** in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul”
12:intro f66j 0 # Acts 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nChapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas and Saul were delivering money from Antioch to Jerusalem, as described in 11:25–30. Herod killed one of the apostles, James, and he put Peter in prison. God helped Peter escape from the prison, so Herod executed the prison guards, but God then killed Herod.
12:1 ti1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
12:1 f2gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατ’ ἐκεῖνον & τὸν καιρὸν 1 The phrase **that time** implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:1 zy6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 The expression **laid on hands** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. See how you translated it in [5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:1 og4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest **some from the church**. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:2 r1zv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀνεῖλεν & Ἰάκωβον 1 It was probably not Herod himself who **killed James**. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to execute James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:3 v4ag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:3 ly66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 The phrase **Unleavened Bread** is the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. If your readers would not be familiar with the food known as “bread” or the substance known as “leaven,” you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “the days of Special Food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12:4 tza2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν 1 The pronouns **whom** refers to Peter, and the pronoun **he** refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12:4 pps1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 These **quaternions** were groups of four **soldiers** each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:4 i23a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom βουλόμενος & ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 The phrase **to bring him out** means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:5 xpcx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ & Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:5 f8qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσευχὴ & ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:6 km83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν 1 Here, the word translated **to bring him out** is slightly different from the word translated that same way in [12:4](../12/04.md). It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:6 g2bh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with two chains binding him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:7 i7g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἄγγελος 1 Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly this **angel** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:9 wqct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations οὐκ ᾔδει ὅτι ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; ἐδόκει δὲ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here and to add a sentence break. Alternate translation: “he did not realize, ‘What is being done by the angel is real!’ He was thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
12:9 p9ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what the angel was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:9 s9j0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐδόκει & ὅραμα βλέπειν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
12:10 r7gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διελθόντες & πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν 1 The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:10 e36s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ δευτέραν 1 The word **guard** can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
12:11 wlb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν 1 The phrase **having come to himself** means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:11 ue4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 Here, **hand** represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:11 p739 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **expectation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:11 sl07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke is likely using the phrase **the Jewish people** to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:12 ux4v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:12 c1ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἱκανοὶ 1 Luke is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
12:13 pfn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κρούσαντος & αὐτοῦ 1 To “knock” at a door means to tap or hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:13 c634 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 Here, the word **gate** probably describes an entrance from the street to a courtyard in front of the house. If houses in your culture have a similar entrance, in your translation you could use the name for it in your language. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:13 vbjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ῥόδη 1 The word **Rhoda** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12:14 y2ff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:15 j2kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & εἶπαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were inside the house praying. Alternate translation: “the people who were inside the house praying said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12:15 qa8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 Some Jews believed in guardian angels, and the people inside thehouse may have thought that Peter’s **angel** had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you saw was Peter’s guardian angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:16 wwg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 While the word **they** refers to the people in the house as in the previous verse, it is likely that only some of them came to the door. Alternate translation: “so some of the people in the house came and opened the door, and they saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:17 fr3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰακώβῳ 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by **James**, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:17 jf16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:18 ail9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
12:18 zl7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
12:18 bt2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
12:18 plyg τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 The word translated **become** can be used to indicate that a person has entered a new condition, and in this context it indicates that Peter has changed his location. Alternate translation: “where then Peter had gone”
12:19 blx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12:19 pz6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν 1 It was probably not Herod himself who **searched for** Peter. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “having ordered a search for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:19 br16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατελθὼν 1 Luke speaks of Herod **having gone down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:20 aip7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
12:20 l5gl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦν & θυμομαχῶν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Herod. Alternate translation: “Herod was quarreling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12:20 osyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Τυρίοις & Σιδωνίοις 1 **Tyrians** is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and **Sidonians** is the name for people from the city of Sidon. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12:20 mpgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
12:20 gxs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:20 oln5 ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him”
12:20 qsg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βλάστον 1 The word **Blastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12:20 qqj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τοῦ βασιλέως 1 This phrase indicates that **Blastus** was an official whom the king trusted with important responsibilities for his personal affairs. In your translation, use the word or phrase for the most comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “the king’s chamberlain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:20 l5r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were asking the king to restore peaceful relations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:20 j253 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:20 dy51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς 1 The implication is that Herod had stopped supplying food to the people of Tyre and Sidon because he was angry with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply, and Herod had cut off that supply because he was angry with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:21 e3w9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τακτῇ & ἡμέρᾳ 1 The implication is that this was the **day** on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:21 kv7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 Putting on this **royal clothing**, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the **throne** were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
12:21 g6ir καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 The **throne** was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
12:22 feyy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου 1 The people are using one part of Herod, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:23 iw57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
12:23 d419 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 The word translated **worm-eaten** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word **worm-eaten** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:23 pjbw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel **struck** Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word **struck** is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:24 sv8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The verb **being multiplied** tells in what way the word of God was **increasing**, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
12:24 m1sw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **increasing** and **being multiplied**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
12:24 wn8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:24 iwr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπληθύνετο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:25 j2un rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
12:25 rt9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they **returned** to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:25 t7d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading **to** is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
12:25 pv6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in [11:29–30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:25 zhsc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in [12:12](../12/12.md). Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus.\nVerses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus.\nVerses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.\n\nThe chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### A light for the Gentiles\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “the Lord”\n\nIn verses 2, 12, 48, and 49, Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Paul refers to Jesus the same way in verses 10 and 11. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia\n\nIn verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term **our** to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
13:1 fij7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
13:1 srw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. The word **Niger** is another name by which he was known. This is not a racial epithet; it is the Latin word for “black,” and it probably indicates that he was African. Alternate translation: “Simeon the African” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:1 nqp1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Simeon, whom people called Niger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:1 ccel rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μαναήν 1 The word **Manaen** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:1 o8jb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος 1 The word **Lucius** is the name of a man. The word **Cyrenian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Cyrene. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:1 u48c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σύντροφος 1 In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the **foster brother** of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:1 hxh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου 1 In the Roman Empire, a **tetrarch** was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. **Herod the tetrarch** ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in Chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:2 m70r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom λειτουργούντων & αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 The expression **ministering to** means that the believers in Antioch were worshiping God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:2 kox1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
13:2 ifb9 ἀφορίσατε 1 Alternate translation: “Set apart”
13:2 j6ym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς. 1 The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the **work** of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in Chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
13:3 l0cj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns νηστεύσαντες, καὶ προσευξάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, ἀπέλυσαν 1 The pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **them** refers to Barnabas and Saul. The phrase **having fasted and prayed** refers to all of them. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “after they had all fasted and prayed together, the believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul, and then the believers released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:3 ku45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς 1 The believers in Antioch **laid their hands** on Barnabas and Saul as a symbolic action to show that they were sending them on their mission with the blessing and support of the whole church and that they were entrusting them to God’s care. Alternate translation: “placed their hands on them as a sign of blessing and support and as a way of entrusting them to God’s care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
13:3 p1us rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπέλυσαν 1 While in this context the term **released** basically means “sent off,” the implication is that the believers in Antioch were freeing Barnabas and Saul of all of their responsibilities in the church so that they could go on the mission on which the Holy Spirit was sending them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gave them the freedom to go on their new mission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:4 abcj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἐκπεμφθέντες 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Barnabas and Saul. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:4 pisj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had sent them out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:4 iyh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Barnabas and Saul **went down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:4 d1q5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σελεύκιαν 1 The word **Seleucia** is the name of a city that is on the seacoast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:5 at85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σαλαμῖνι 1 The word **Salamis** is the name of a city on the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:5 ct8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Barnabas and Saul to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:6 cl2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πάφου 1 The word **Paphos** is the name of a major city on the island of Cyprus. It was where the Roman proconsul lived. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:6 zf3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εὗρον 1 The word **found** does not mean that Barnabas, Saul, and Mark were intentionally searching for a certain man. They happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “they happened to meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:6 xe7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον 1 The word **magician** here does not mean someone who entertains others with tricks based on slight of hand and optical illusions. It means someone who practices witchcraft or supernatural magic arts. Your language and culture may have a term for such a person that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:6 ak38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 1 The words **Bar Jesus** are a name that means “Son of Jesus.” However, there was no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. **Jesus** was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:7 s1su rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ ἀνθυπάτῳ 1 A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:7 pf5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σεργίῳ Παύλῳ 1 The words **Sergius** and **Paulus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:7 h5xx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ 1 Luke provides this background information about Sergius Paulus to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
13:8 lp2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος 1 The word **Elymas** is an Arabic word that Bar-Jesus was using as another name. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **the Magician**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
13:8 qw4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for that is how one translates his name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:8 w2xt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, **to turn** someone **away from** something is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:9 fy7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Paul as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:9 w3lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit was inspiring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:10 un00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul is using the adjective **full** as a noun to identify Elymas as a person who is full of the negative qualities he describes. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “O you who are full of all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
13:10 u8n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **deceit** and **trickery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “O you who are always deceiving and tricking other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
13:10 r8x2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were a container that was **full** of negative qualities. Alternate translation: “O you who practice all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:10 wq5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 The terms **deceit** and **wickedness** mean similar things. Paul may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “of all evil treachery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
13:10 kdwj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul says **all** in these two instances as a generalization for emphasis. (But when he calls Elymas the **enemy of all righteousness**, that may be understood more literally.) Alternate translation: “of great deceit and great trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
13:10 d2pk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 The expression **son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something or someone else. Paul is saying that Elymas is acting like the devil in trying to keep Sergius Paulus from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:10 jgq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 Paul is drawing an implicit contrast between Elymas’ claim to be the “son of Jesus” (Bar Jesus) and his actual character as a **son of the devil**. If you retain the “son of” idiom in your translation, you could bring out this contrast explicitly. If you do, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are not the son of Jesus—you are the son of the devil!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:10 hlq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 Paul is speaking of **righteousness** as if it were a person who could have an **enemy**. If your language would not use this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “opposed to all righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
13:10 wa8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enemy of everything that is right” or “opposed to everything that is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
13:10 bc9p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? 1 Paul is using the question form to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must stop turning aside the straight paths of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
13:10 p8sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας 1 Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were physically redirecting **paths** that God wanted people to follow so that these paths no longer went **straight**. He means that if people believe in God and obey him, they live in the right way, and that Elymas is trying to keep people, especially Sergius Paulus, from doing that. Alternate translation: “preventing people from believing in God, obeying him, and living right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:11 q0w8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus Elymas’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:11 xul9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ 1 Here the word **hand** represents the power of God, and the phrase **upon you** indicates punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord is going to punish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:11 w3gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τυφλὸς, μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον 1 Paul is using a word and a phrase together to express a single idea. The phrase **not seeing the sun** tells to what degree Elymas will be **blind**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “so blind that you will not be able to tell whether it is day or night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
13:11 t7j1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 Paul is speaking of this **mist** and **darkness** as if they were going to **fall** on Elymas. Alternate translation: “what Elymas could see became blurry and then dark” or see the next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:11 x7rt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 Luke may be using the two words **mist** and **darkness** together to express a single idea. The word **mist** may tell what kind of **darkness** was all that Elymas could see. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “a misty darkness was all that Elymas could see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
13:12 x9fl ὁ ἀνθύπατος 1 A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “the governor”
13:12 twa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The teaching of the Lord astonished him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:12 ob5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the word **teaching** to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:12 efle rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 In this possessive form, **the Lord** is the object rather than the subject of **teaching**. That is, this does not mean “what the Lord taught,” it means “what Barnabas and Paul taught about the Lord.” you could state that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
13:13 r9hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
13:13 i65t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 The phrase **those around Paul** refers to Barnabas and John (who is also called John Mark). This phrase provides some background to the rest of the story by indicating that Paul had become the leader of the group. It is important to communicate this by keeping Paul’s name first when he is mentioned with others, for example, in [13:46](../13/46.md), [13:50](../13/50.md), etc. The order of names is important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
13:13 abcl οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “Paul and his traveling companions”
13:13 mmj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας 1 The word **Perga** is the name of a city, and the word **Pamphylia** is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:14 et2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:14 c21u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐκάθισαν 1 Paul and Barnabas may have **sat down** in the place where rabbis would sit, or in the way that rabbis would sit, as a way of asking permission to speak to the congregation. The fact that they were invited to speak ([13:15](../13/15.md)) suggests that this is the case. Alternate translation: “sat down as rabbis would, to ask permission to speak to the congregation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
13:15 dnb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 The word **Law** is the name for one part of the Hebrew Scriptures, and the word **Prophets** is the name for another part of the Hebrew Scriptures. Even though these are common nouns, Luke is using them to mean specific things. Show this in your translation in the way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
13:15 kno1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” or “You brothers of ours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:15 td4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 The synagogue leaders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:15 jru8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 The synagogue leaders are using the term **word** to mean what Barnabas or Paul would want to say using words. Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:15 kj1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative λέγετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an invitation. Alternate translation: “we invite you to speak it now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
13:16 keqb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that Paul stood up to show that he indeed wanted to speak, as he had been invited to do. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he wanted to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
13:16 i8pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ 1 This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He wanted everyone in the synagogue to hear what he had to say from the very first word, so he did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
13:16 m0yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται, καὶ οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Israelites and you who fear God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:16 rh93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. That is what Paul means here. See how you translated the similar expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “you Gentiles who sincerely worship the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:16 ah55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀκούσατε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
13:17 se2b ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ 1 Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”
13:17 tbc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form of the word **our** here and in verses 32 and 33. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
13:17 l9cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:17 aaj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν 1 When Paul says that God **exalted the people** of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:17 vw4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ 1 Here, **an uplifted arm** describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:18 zv9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς 1 This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. Paul would be quoting Deuteronomy 1:13 from a well-known Greek translation. If the reading **put up with them** is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in [13:40–41](../13/40.md). If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
13:19 nvp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, the pronoun **them** refers to the Israelites, and the pronoun **their** refers to the seven nations that God destroyed. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God gave the Israelites for an inheritance the land that these seven nations had previously occupied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:20 xyg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “All these events took place over a period of about 450 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
13:20 qmc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου 1 This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:21 yxi8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
13:22 bsp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα 1 Here, the expression **raised up** describes God giving someone an important position. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “made David their king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:22 akg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου 1 In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel [13:14](../1sa/13/14.md) and Psalm [89:20](../psa/089/020.md).) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
13:22 dbu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εὗρον 1 While God was indeed searching for someone to replace Saul, here the word **found** does not refer to the results of that search, but rather to God’s estimation of David. Alternate translation: “I have recognized that David, son of Jesse, is a man according to my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:22 mp53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου 1 This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:23 xj5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τούτου & ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
13:23 vnz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ σπέρματος 1 The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:23 l50d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτου 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to David. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:23 kc76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here, **Israel** refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:24 wbpf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, Paul is referring implicitly to John the Baptist. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:24 xzf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 In your language, the expression **before the face of his entrance**, meaning “before the appearance of his entry into ministry” (see next two notes), might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “before he appeared” or “before he entered into his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
13:24 abcn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 Here the term **face** means “appearance.” Alternate translation: “appearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:24 igpi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 By **entrance**, Paul is referring to Jesus beginning his ministry. Alternate translation: “of the start of his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:24 gqs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’ entrance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:24 x892 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to all the people of Israel a baptism that people received to show that they were repenting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
13:25 ntrj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον 1 Paul is speaking of John as if he had been running a race or **course**. Alternate translation: “his work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:25 judg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἔλεγεν, τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it might be good to present this quotation from John the Baptist as a direct quotation if possible, since it uses several figures of speech that might not sound natural in an indirect quotation. (As an indirect quotation, this would read something like this: “he asked the people who they thought him to be, and he told them he was not he and that behold, one was coming after him, the sandals of whose feet he was not worthy to untie.”) You may be able to indicate the beginning of Paul’s quotation from John with some punctuation or convention that your language uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
13:25 vww3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 John is using the question form to challenge his listeners’ idea of who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not who you think I am!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
13:25 rp32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to the Messiah. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:25 nnl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 John is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:25 gys2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 John is using the action of untying sandals symbolically to signify humble service. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to whom I am not even worthy to offer humble service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
13:25 gj98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν 1 In your language, the expression **the sandals of his feet** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “his sandals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
13:26 bwet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:26 kci9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:26 c9pw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor υἱοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:26 jdp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks this distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
13:26 u6zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent the word about this salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:26 zx08 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that God sent about Jesus by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:26 v6r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God is saving people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
13:27 s64d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “not recognizing Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:27 psk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 Paul means implicitly that the people of Jerusalem and their leaders did not recognize that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “not recognizing that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:27 ri1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 Paul is using the word **voices** to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:27 m4tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:27 i6jo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of **the prophets** on each **Sabbath** in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:28 v3hw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders asked Pilate for Jesus to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:28 iect rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:29 sq1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets had written about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:29 m5f1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 It may be helpful to say explicitly that Jesus had died before this happened. Alternate translation: “taking him down from the tree after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:29 vwt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ ξύλου 1 The word translated **tree** can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Paul is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “from the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:30 h5jw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 Paul uses the word **But** to indicate a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
13:30 zsx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:30 mqx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
13:31 zesg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus was seen for many days by the ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:31 ig7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:31 g4vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμέρας πλείους 1 We know from the Gospels that this period was 40 days. Translate **many days** with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:31 rw9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν 1 Paul says **having come up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “by the ones who traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:32 h6ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίαν γενομένην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to a **promise** that God made. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:32 hr2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:33 b1uh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge ὅτι ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. you could state something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
13:33 t0wt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταύτην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **this** he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:33 dy6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. If the reading **for our children** is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
13:33 t176 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term **children** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:33 d95n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “causing Jesus to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:33 y3tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:33 h9ir rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τῷ ψαλμῷ & τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
13:33 ljnl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Psalm 2 as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
13:33 c1pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “You are my Son, yes, today I have fathered you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
13:33 tla1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱός & γεγέννηκά σε 1 **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
13:34 zhjq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν & εἴρηκεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God raised Jesus … God has spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:34 je9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν 1 As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “he brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:34 h3nj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
13:34 ipb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά 1 This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and ultimately the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
13:34 q3kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά 1 Paul is using the adjectives **holy** and **trustworthy** as nouns. ULT adds the word **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the trustworthy promises that God made to David as the ancestor of the Holy One” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
13:35 r1ev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἑτέρῳ 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **another place**, he means another place in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in another place in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:35 gl8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ & λέγει 1 Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun **he** refers to God, as in [13:34](../13/34.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:35 d4px rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:35 jvpy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
13:35 hvt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:35 bhos rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:36 rpb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **fell asleep**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
13:36 nwy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶδεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers and he saw” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:36 f5s2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:36 la5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 Paul is using the word **saw** to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:36 okfp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 Here, the term **decay** refers to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:37 bmw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃν & ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:37 n9pl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:37 j52x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:37 g3ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:38 yg35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν & ἔστω ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
13:38 f917 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:38 qy18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word **brothers** as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:38 an8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτου 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:38 t3i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we are proclaiming forgiveness of sins to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:38 w7y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “release of sins is proclaimed to you, and release is also proclaimed to you from the guilt of everything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
13:38 xjzi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμῳ Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that you were not able to do in obedience to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:39 g5h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God justifies everyone who believes in this one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:39 ki8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:40 y2kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy βλέπετε 1 Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:40 tt1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the thing that the prophets spoke about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:40 osou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification μὴ ἐπέλθῃ 1 Paul is speaking of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could **come upon** his listeners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that … may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
13:41 kk1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
13:41 jveu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἴδετε 1 Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:41 xcdg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφανίσθητε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:41 dvn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔργον ἐργάζομαι & ἔργον 1 God is using the word **work** to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment … a judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:41 nm2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 God is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:42 ax8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν 1 Here the pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:42 f3sw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρεκάλουν 1 Here the pronoun **they** refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:42 w9h6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:42 y4p9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:43 a58z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λυθείσης & τῆς συναγωγῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the synagogue meeting ended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:43 sws7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown προσηλύτων 1 These **proselytes** were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. Alternate translation: “converts to Judaism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:43 mygk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠκολούθησαν & τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ 1 In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:43 fv15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to God, who had graciously saved them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
13:44 vq3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 The **city** represents the people in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:44 h40t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνήχθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:44 yga7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak **the word of the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:44 evox rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:45 j4zq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
13:45 qrh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:45 m1an rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:46 d08v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:46 jn55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑμῖν & ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the term **word** to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:46 as6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑμῖν & πρῶτον 1 Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people, and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people, and God sent the Messiah initially to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:46 lly5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:46 ms36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 Paul does not seriously believe that the Jewish leaders do not consider themselves worthy of eternal life. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. Alternate translation: “are acting as if you judge yourselves not worthy of eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
13:46 kzm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the term **behold** to focus the attention of the Jewish leaders on what they are about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:46 rf9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they are going to be physically **turning** toward **the Gentiles**. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:46 zvt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive στρεφόμεθα 1 By **we**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
13:47 tx94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
13:47 xbiw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
13:47 v8au rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς 1 Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a **light** that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
13:47 za1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σε 1 The word **you** is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
13:47 t5sp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἶναί & εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
13:47 ismw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:48 e9ag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:48 jct2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τεταγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:49 qh9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:49 fpkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διεφέρετο & ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:50 u8rm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
13:50 ef21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρώτρυναν 1 Luke says that the Jewish leaders **stirred up** these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:50 f5yd τὰς σεβομένας γυναῖκας τὰς εὐσχήμονας 1 Alternate translation: “the influential women among the Gentile women who worshiped in the synagogue”
13:50 wmm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς πρώτους 1 Luke is using the adjective **principal** as a noun, to mean people who are important. (ULT adds the word **ones** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most important men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
13:50 uc54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the influential women and important men, not to the Jewish leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the influential women and important men threw them out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:50 cq9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 Luke is probably not speaking literally when he says that they **threw** them out. It is unlikely that they actually picked up Paul and Barnabas and heaved them through the air. Alternate translation: “they forced Paul and Barnabas to leave their boundaries” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:50 kzzk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia by association with the way that it had **boundaries** and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:51 abco rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
13:51 xi1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
13:52 dp5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἵ & μαθηταὶ 1 Here, **the disciples** implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:52 hhgj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of these disciples as if they were a container that **joy** and **the Holy Spirit** had **filled**. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.\n- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.\n- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “the word of his grace”\n\nThe expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])\n\n### Zeus and Hermes\n\nIn this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”\n\nJesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encouraged the new believers in the cities that they had visited.
14:1 hk1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
14:1 f4sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:2 wc4x οἱ & ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”
14:2 n2pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπήγειραν 1 Luke says that these Jews**stirred up** the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:2 k8mv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their **souls**, to mean all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
14:2 fu13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:3 a3gp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὖν 1 Luke uses the word **But** here to indicate a contrast between what the unfaithful Jews did and what Paul and Barnabas did in response. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
14:3 fifi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness ἐπὶ τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
14:3 f2xh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:3 wcn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14:3 c2cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
14:3 p9iq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 Here, **hands** represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:4 btu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσχίσθη & τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:4 q1xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
14:5 q6g2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς 1 Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **stone** tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to **mistreat** Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “to put them to death by stoning them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
14:6 tpl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῆς Λυκαονίας 1 The word **Lycaonia** is the name of a district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
14:6 tl4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δέρβην 1 The word**Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
14:8 wb5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ & ἐκάθητο 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
14:8 kz7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀδύνατος & τοῖς ποσὶν 1 Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:8 tca1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lame from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:9 di49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν 1 The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to the lame man, and the pronoun **who** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
14:9 xak4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14:9 uwov rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean **healed**.) Alternate translation: “he could trust Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:10 i2kz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἶπεν & ἥλατο 1 The first instance of the pronoun **He** refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
14:10 tect rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός 1 This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah gives you the ability to walk” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
14:10 sagd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός! 1 It might seem that the expression **Arise upon your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “Get up!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
14:10 v1kz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἥλατο 1 The implication is that the man’s legs were completely healed. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the man was completely healed and he jumped up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:11 isyz ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
14:11 lvs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 The phrase **raised up their voice** is an idiom that means that the crowds spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they said loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
14:11 dw4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes Λυκαονιστὶ λέγοντες, οἱ θεοὶ ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις, κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying in Lycaonian that the gods, having been made like men, had come down to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
14:11 x3bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λυκαονιστὶ 1 The word **Lycaonian** is the name of the language that was spoken in district District of Lycaonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
14:11 rm85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having become like men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:12 t7uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δία 1 The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god who was considered to be the ruler of all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
14:12 hh25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 The word **Hermes** is the name of the pagan god who was thought to bring messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
14:12 i1fa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸν δὲ Παῦλον, Ἑρμῆν, 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they were calling Paul ‘Hermes,’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
14:12 d9lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:12 l63q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
14:13 iz6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 Luke is using the name **Zeus** to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus, which was before the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:13 sh4o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 Here, **before** means “in front of”. Luke is referring to the temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city of Iconium. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “of the Temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:13 v2a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταύρους καὶ στέμματα 1 The implication is that the priest had put these **wreaths** on the **oxen** because they were going to be offered as a sacrifice. That was the custom in this culture. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “oxen that were wearing wreaths as sacrificial animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:13 ud37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺν τοῖς ὄχλοις ἤθελεν θύειν 1 Luke means implicitly that the priest of Zeus wanted to offer the oxen as sacrifices to Paul and Barnabas, whom the people thought were the gods Zeus and Hermes. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “was wanting to offer sacrifice with the crowds to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:14 kx43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν 1 Barnabas and Paul tore their clothes as a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “tearing their clothing to show how distressed they were that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
14:14 wa4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys κράζοντες 1 Together with the word “saying” in the next verse, the phrase “crying out” expresses a single idea. The phrase **crying out** tells how Barnabas and Paul were **saying** what they said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “saying loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
14:15 ee13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul and Barnabas are likely using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women, since both men and women of Lystra were probably in the crowd that wanted to sacrifice to them. To make this clear to your readers, you could use a term in your language that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “You people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
14:15 w4fd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you would express this question as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “People, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:15 u9pq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι 1 People in this culture believed that the gods did not have passions as humans do. So the implication of this statement is that Paul and Barnabas are human beings and not gods. You can include this information in your translation if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “We are human beings just like you. We are not gods!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:15 n98g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they want the people in Lystra physically to **turn** from idol worship and believe in the one true God. They mean that the people should stop living in one way and should start living in another way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:15 blhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τούτων τῶν ματαίων 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the adjective **useless** as a noun to mean the false gods that the people of Lystra had been worshiping. ULT adds the word **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “these false gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
14:15 qr5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 This expression is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
14:15 lw9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
14:16 vpt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:17 kig8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
14:17 c1se rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς 1 It might seem that the expression **rains from the sky** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “providing rain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
14:17 ps9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐμπιπλῶν & τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their **hearts**, meaning their desires, to mean their entire beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
14:17 en5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **gladness** tells how the food that God provided made these people feel. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “enjoyable food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
14:19 wmc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 It may be helpful to state explicitly what they **persuaded the crowds** to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the crowds not to believe Paul and Barnabas and to turn violently against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:20 aqx3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν & εἰσῆλθεν & ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronouns **him** and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
14:21 lint rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj μαθητεύσαντες ἱκανοὺς 1 Luke is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean the people who became disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “having helped many people to become disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
14:22 ek9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 Luke is using one part of the disciples, their **souls**, to represent their entire beings as believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
14:22 zkd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “encouraging them to keep believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14:22 d9ic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
14:22 ci6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “It is necessary for us to endure many afflictions in order to live in allegiance to God as our true king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14:22 wu1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean both themselves and the believers to whom they were speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
14:23 pk5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns χειροτονήσαντες & παρέθεντο & πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
14:23 mqp9 κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν 1 Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers”
14:23 n81l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
14:25 t513 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:25 h8sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν 1 Luke says that Paul and Barnabas **went down** to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
14:26 f2cg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:26 p2gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had asked God to care for them graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14:27 vcd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀνήγγελλον & αὐτῶν & ἤνοιξεν 1 The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun **he** refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting … them … God had opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
14:27 qcl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God **had done** something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership **with** God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do by working together with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
14:27 vymy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 Here, the possessive form describes not a **door** consisting of **faith** but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
14:27 b4id rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 Here the expression **opened a door** means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:27 xgvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14:28 abcq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
15:intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.\nVerses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.\n\nEven if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?\n\nSome believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
15:1 su66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τινες 1 Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:1 p3k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:1 zi1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were teaching the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:1 pm8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:1 lwbi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:2 abcr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **little**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
15:2 f9nd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως 1 The terms **dispute** and **debate** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “controversy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
15:2 w6tc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πρὸς αὐτοὺς & ἔταξαν & ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
15:2 ek6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:3 av5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:3 aia5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:3 rk37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **conversion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how some of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:3 nje7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:3 bbd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:3 c03o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 The word **all** here may be a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “in the believers in those places” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
15:4 ej1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church the apostles and the elders welcome them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:4 jblr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the **apostles** and **elders** separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:4 a2x1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 See how you translated this same expression in [14:27](../14/27.md). Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:5 zcv0 πεπιστευκότες 1 Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus”
15:5 crr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐξανέστησαν 1 These believers **stood up** to indicate that they had something important to say. Alternate translation: “stood up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
15:5 efe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς & παραγγέλλειν 1 Both instances of the pronoun **them** refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in [15:3](../15/03.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted … command them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
15:6 gqt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνήχθησάν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:6 ugu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἰδεῖν περὶ 1 Here the phrase **to see about** is an idiom that means “to consider.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:6 vcsc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:7 zhco rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναστὰς Πέτρος 1 Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. If your readers might not understand the significance of this action, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Peter, standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
15:7 c2q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
15:7 s6ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:7 a6q9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:7 wct8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν 1 Both occurrences of **you** are plural since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
15:7 hk4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 For emphasis, Peter is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
15:7 ftl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων 1 Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:7 s3wb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 Peter is using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
15:7 b5s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean the message that he shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:8 m1xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 Here, the word **heart** refers to a person’s character and intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:8 p6d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς 1 The implication is not that God testified to the Gentiles about Jesus, but that by giving the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, God testified to Peter and his companions that they could have genuine faith. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “testified to their genuine faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:8 abcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave the Holy Spirit to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
15:8 wlzx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
15:9 zs2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **distinguish**, which in this context means “discriminate.” Alternate translation: “he regarded them in the same way he regarded us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
15:9 jr3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
15:9 ase1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally **cleansed** their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:9 yi8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:10 rfr4 νῦν οὖν τί 1 **Now** in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me, therefore: Why”
15:10 zaz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? 1 Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement, ending the verse with a period or exclamation point. Alternate translation: “you must not test God to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
15:10 ha45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς 1 Peter is using the words **our** and **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
15:10 n2bv τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν 1 Here the word **testing** means **challenging**. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”
15:10 qpyd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι 1 Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:10 bdfu τὸν τράχηλον 1 Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **neck**. Alternate translation: “the necks”
15:10 bfd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:11 e1m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun **ourselves**. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
15:11 q28c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:11 nhq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using the pronoun **we** and the implied pronoun **ourselves** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
15:11 d3z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through what God has graciously done for us through the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:11 ln38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Peter means implicitly that we are saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:11 e96c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way they also will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
15:11 c8mw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κἀκεῖνοι 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the pronoun **they** to refer to the Gentiles. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles also will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:12 kxjq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation, as in UST: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
15:13 odjm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων 1 Together the words **answered** and **saying** mean that James responded to what everyone in the meeting had said to that point. Alternate translation: “James responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
15:13 pl6m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:14 jjyc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Συμεὼν 1 The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
15:14 abct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο 1 James is speaking of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:14 pnr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term **name** to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term **name** to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:15 am6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 James is using the term **words** to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:15 j4f5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:16 m3lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
15:16 h9um rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀναστρέψω & ἀνοικοδομήσω & ἀνοικοδομήσω 1 The pronoun **I** refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
15:16 wqi6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀναστρέψω 1 God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now **return**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:16 fhdr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:16 f5wf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a **tent** that had **fallen** down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:16 u0r6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:17 hkw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
15:17 pe4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον 1 God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
15:17 sm79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον 1 God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:17 s6de rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
15:17 tu21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:17 c8gm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [15:14](../15/14.md). (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:18 tr27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γνωστὰ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:19 pyb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 In your translation, you could make explicit in what way James does not want to **trouble** these **Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:19 vr6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically **turning** to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of this expression plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:20 vcm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
15:20 wx8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **pollution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:20 qun9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
15:20 n6f2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 James is likely talking about food that has been offered to **idols**, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:20 j2rl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, for one thing, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been **strangled**, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. For another thing, while James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood, he is saying implicitly that they should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood, and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:20 brc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is using the adjective **strangled** as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
15:20 h27f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:21 si1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshiping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:21 zd7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς & ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει & ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 James is using the name **Moses** to mean the law associated with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:21 wp1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:21 xg5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ πόλιν 1 The expression **by city** means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:22 hp6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Here the word **church** describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:22 g6e8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **church** in Jerusalem. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “all the people of the church in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:22 c711 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 The words **Judas** and **Barsabbas** are the names of men. **Barsabbas** was another name by which **Judas** was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. See how you translated this same name for another man in [1:23](../01/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
15:22 s6lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Judas, whom people called Barsabbas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:22 s6d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:23 k6cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word **hand** to mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:23 xz3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
15:23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
15:23 kp51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ & ἀδελφοῖς 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:24 g8m9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν & ἡμῶν & οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
15:24 p1tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word **some** refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:24 hbw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγοις 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **words** to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:24 bxq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to whom they are writing, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
15:26 gldi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώποις παραδεδωκόσι 1 By **men**, the letter implicitly means Paul and Barnabas. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those two men have handed over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:26 dhj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is using the term **souls** to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:26 dinn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally **handed over** their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:26 t7vw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This is a figurative expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:27 y972 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά 1 The letter is using the adjective **same** as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds **thing** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
15:27 xw8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:28 l9z6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον & βάρος 1 The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:28 bx90 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:29 nt7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἰδωλοθύτων 1 The letter is using the adjective **sacrificed**, with the qualifier **to idols**, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
15:29 vcc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αἵματος 1 See how you translated **blood** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:29 rt55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πνικτῶν 1 See how you translated **the strangled** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
15:29 buy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἔρρωσθε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a friendly wish rather than a command. This was the customary way of ending a letter in this culture. Your language may have its own way of ending a letter that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
15:30 usz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:30 c3uk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
15:30 t55a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that these four men **came down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:30 oh4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go κατῆλθον 1 You may wish to retain the idiom for travel to a lower elevation, and if so, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
15:30 yl8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πλῆθος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the crowd**, he means the people of the church in Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the people of the church in Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:31 k1mr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐχάρησαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
15:31 e4gf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **encouragement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:32 r65l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες 1 When Luke says **also**, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were [13:1](../13/01.md). You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:32 e2en rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:32 frea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ & καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:32 j99g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:33 v6im rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:33 wzw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:33 xv3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:34 hkh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
15:35 anfc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
15:35 e7s4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:35 hnnb rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
15:36 jjoa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡμέρας 1 Luke is using the term **days** to mean “time.” Alternate translation: “time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:36 ib2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:36 ua1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:36 k08n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
15:36 y9i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
15:38 a5nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes Παῦλος & ἠξίου & μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
15:39 u97a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων; τόν τε Βαρναβᾶν παραλαβόντα τὸν Μᾶρκον, ἐκπλεῦσαι εἰς Κύπρον 1 If your language does not use the passive form **to be separated**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they separated from each other and Barnabas, taking Mark with him, sailed away to Cyprus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:40 l2uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς & ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the brothers had commended him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:40 tt2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the gracious care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15:40 xkjo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
15:41 cbat rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διήρχετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
15:41 e3ym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
15:41 s7yf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer to the people associated with the churches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:41 tbv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.\n- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi\n- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Timothy’s circumcision\n\nPaul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.
16:1 m5tb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν & καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
16:1 rhut rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατήντησεν & καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:1 km5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go κατήντησεν & καὶ 1 If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
16:1 u3vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:1 f49m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain disciple** to introduce **Timothy** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
16:1 mc9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖ 1 By **there**, Luke means the city of Lystra. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in Lystra” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:1 wxl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 By **believing**, Luke means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:1 vh73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:2 t1lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:2 rez2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:3 p6z8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:3 bdd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:3 za93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 By **those places**, Luke means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:3 hk2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:3 pybf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ᾔδεισαν & ἅπαντες 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
16:4 n46i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διεπορεύοντο & παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going … they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:4 bu6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
16:4 gpi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:5 q8v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:6 dhmn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διῆλθον & τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν, κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος λαλῆσαι τὸν λόγον ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia, they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
16:6 g97e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Φρυγίαν & Γαλατικὴν χώραν & τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 The word **Phrygia** is the name of a region in northwestern Asia Minor. See how you translated this name in [2:10](../02/10.md). The word **Galatian** describes the region of Galatia in central Asia Minor. The word **Asia** is the name of a Roman province in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:6 qk0k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν 1 Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
16:6 ue3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:6 d56g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
16:6 h4u4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:7 b1xq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μυσίαν & Βιθυνίαν 1 The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:7 b539 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the Spirit of Jesus**, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:8 s6l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατέβησαν 1 Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:8 xq6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go κατέβησαν 1 In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
16:9 cm2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διαβὰς 1 The man in the vision uses the phrase **coming over** because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “across the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:9 tzxh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις 1 Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:10 q0c7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἶδεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul had seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:10 fg5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **we** and **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:10 e884 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 Luke is using the pronouns **we** and **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16:10 iu0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:11 q2pr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην & Νέαν Πόλιν 1 The word **Samothrace** is the name of an island, and the word **Neapolis** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:11 ojte rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τῇ δὲ ἐπιούσῃ εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the next day we sailed to Neapolis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
16:12 c8ox rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis κἀκεῖθεν εἰς Φιλίππους 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and from there we traveled overland to Philippi” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
16:12 thk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κολωνία 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **colony** he means a Roman colony. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Philippi is a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:12 tl9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κολωνία 1 In the Roman empire, a **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:14 n952 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία & ἤκουεν 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain woman** to introduce **Lydia** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
16:14 se6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λυδία 1 The word **Lydia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:14 qj86 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 Luke is using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:14 c6n8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Θυατείρων 1 The word **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:14 cyk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 Here the expression **worshiping God** means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:14 rd4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:14 s9ju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here, the **heart** represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:14 a74y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:15 f38e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς & ἐβαπτίσθη 1 The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:15 g7e9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:15 lv50 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
16:15 s799 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:15 igcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural here. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
16:15 g8ul rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
16:15 xnkk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
16:15 hkh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16:16 ufy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
16:16 y1gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain young female slave** to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
16:16 ymt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 Luke is describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python; it was a demonic spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:16 h2c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
16:17 tni9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 This woman is speaking as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:17 gsbj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
16:18 lj79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας & εἶπεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned and said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:18 qi1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:18 u4z8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes; it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:19 r1a1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 The implication is that the **masters** could no longer **profit** from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:19 bws7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
16:19 hf82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas **to the rulers** in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:20 wn77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:20 dkz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16:21 gna6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 The terms **accept** and **practice** mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
16:22 f03y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:22 r1gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & ἐκέλευον 1 The pronouns **them** and **their** refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:22 at6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:23 dsr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πολλάς & ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 This is an idiomatic expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:23 la4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:24 jug6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ξύλον 1 The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
16:24 z12w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:26 q7z1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:26 m4ye rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
16:26 s6mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν & αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:26 p393 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:26 b540 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all** he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:27 cwt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν, νομίζων ἐκπεφευγέναι τοὺς δεσμίους 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that death was the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:27 viov rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:28 ljy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 By **we**, Paul means himself and the other prisoners but not the jailer, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16:28 s2s2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please do not hurt yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
16:29 pe66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αἰτήσας & φῶτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer **called for lights** because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:29 bb6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “he knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
16:30 u132 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα σωθῶ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order for God to save me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:31 m801 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:31 f104 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative πίστευσον ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν καὶ σωθήσῃ 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe in the Lord Jesus, you will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
16:31 br4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:31 w8ed rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:32 pq5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:32 ftg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
16:33 gied rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16:33 r3la rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16:34 v5fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:35 lb4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
16:36 qrw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:36 f76u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
16:36 noc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
16:37 b4jm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτούς 1 The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:37 xmqz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτούς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν & ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:37 v4yk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16:37 qq1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
16:37 b7cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:37 b5a3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
16:37 jr2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ, ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
16:37 sw3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they lead us out” or “they should lead us out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
16:37 x82d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
16:38 ldfi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:38 ym2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:38 lqs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
16:39 q59h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς & ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
16:39 a7yq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:40 y14i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
16:40 ylk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 Luke is referring to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:40 t1pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
16:40 ntc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:40 qs0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
16:40 gld6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.\n- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.\nVerses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The religion of Athens\n\nPaul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\nAs Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
17:1 e4w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
17:1 kll1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:1 o19x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
17:2 mkn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς & αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:3 lt8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with **and**. The phrase **fully opening them** tells how Paul was **demonstrating** from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “by opening the Scriptures fully, demonstrating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
17:3 ir9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:3 ipb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 Luke is using the word **rise** to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:3 b9qi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
17:4 es2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:4 t21z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῶν & σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:4 ye8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
17:5 clcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
17:5 ie1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in [16:20](../16/20.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
17:5 t3bc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 The word **city** represents the people of the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:5 w94p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰάσονος 1 Luke does not tell us anything further about this **Jason**, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:5 ks2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 The word **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:5 abcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:6 i79p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:6 x90b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17:8 ixmb rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:9 ya44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸ ἱκανὸν 1 A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
17:9 eq4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the city officials, and the pronoun **them** refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:10 qy5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:10 m75m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **the synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
17:11 k2st rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
17:11 alq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτοι & τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ 1 Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun **these** to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun **those** to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:11 gu6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εὐγενέστεροι 1 Luke is using the word **noble**, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:11 hle3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:11 uh8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17:11 qrnm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:11 g8an rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
17:12 abcv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
17:13 ybos rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ & κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:13 dijk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:13 wjq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
17:14 ael8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:14 zw1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
17:15 gs1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
17:16 y9cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
17:16 wk63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Silas and Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Silas and Timothy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:16 u2th rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
17:16 s011 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:16 we78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:17 jkj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:17 ec14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [16:19](../16/19.md). Alternate translation: “in the public square” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
17:18 ru6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & δοκεῖ & εὐηγγελίζετο 1 The pronouns **him**, **He**, and **he** all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul … He seems … Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:18 l7le rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων 1 The word **Epicurean** is the name of a certain kind of philosopher. Epicureans believed that all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:18 f976 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Στοϊκῶν 1 The word **Stoic** is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal, loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:18 g4bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:18 sx9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new **gods** that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:19 unc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 The word **Areopagus** means “Hill of Ares” in Greek. It was named after the pagan god whose name was Ares in Greek and Mars in Latin. Luke does not explain the meaning of this word, since his readers already understand Greek. ULT spells this name the way it sounds in English. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also translate the meaning of the word and use the name “Mars Hill,” as UST does. Or you could spell the word the way it sounds and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Mars Hill” or “the Areopagus, that is, Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
17:19 b56g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:19 aciu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? 1 This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
17:19 g9gb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα 1 By **we**, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
17:19 n250 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:20 lay8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα & τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 The philosophers are speaking of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objects that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:20 us7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 The philosophers are referring to hearing by association with the **ears**, which people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:20 fs5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & βουλόμεθα 1 By **our** and **we**, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
17:20 fe4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι 1 The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:21 ujgi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce background information about the people of Athens that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
17:21 dn1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι & πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι & ηὐκαίρουν 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners loved to devote their leisure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17:21 d8yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:21 ij4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 Here, Luke says **nothing other** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “made it their favorite leisure activity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17:21 wr1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τι καινότερον 1 This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something **newer** than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form **newer** with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:22 k5dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σταθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου ἔφη 1 If your language does not use the passive form **having been stood**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Once the philosophers had stood Paul in the middle of the Areopagus, he was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:22 zq3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 As in [17:19](../17/19.md), Luke uses the word **Areopagus** by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:22 h5et rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:22 kcag δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 Paul is using the comparative form **more religious** for emphasis. Your language may use comparative forms in the same way. If not, you could convey the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very religious”
17:22 ja1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17:23 cem7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 While it would be preferable to present this as a direct quotation (see next note), you could translate this as an indirect quotation so that there is not one direct quotation within another. Alternate translation: “an altar whose inscription dedicated it to an unknown god” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
17:23 nmwv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
17:23 t3mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:24 f2mz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
17:24 ju4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 Paul is using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
17:25 e3dg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do hands of men care for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:25 cqri προσδεόμενός τινος 1 Alternate translation: “as if he needed anything”
17:25 yq68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 Paul is using one part of a person, the **hands**, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
17:25 sj89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 Paul is using the word **himself** for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
17:25 zv8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν 1 The terms **life** and **breath** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
17:25 sw8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶσι 1 By **all**, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:26 p1e4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἑνὸς 1 By **one**, Paul implicitly means “one man.” He means Adam, the first person God created. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one man” or “Adam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:26 cnbu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “every nation of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
17:27 s2xs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν 1 Paul means implicitly that God did the things he described in the previous verse, giving the nations of humanity particular times to live in particular places, so that they would **seek** him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “God did this so that people would seek him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:27 jae5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 Paul is speaking as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:27 p8hk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ 1 Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
17:27 onm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
17:28 tkd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & γένος 1 The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
17:28 o4vy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ζῶμεν & ἐσμέν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
17:28 jxph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Here Paul is quoting from the Greek philosopher-poet Epimenides and from the Greek poets Aratus and Cleanthes. While it would be preferable to present these two quotations as direct quotations (see next note), you could translate them as indirect quotations so that there are not direct quotations within a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “For some of your own poets have said that in him we live and are moved and are and that we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
17:28 rpaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
17:28 ii2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 The expressions **live** and **are moved** and **are** mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “For he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
17:28 cbd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 If your language does not use the passive form **are moved**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For ‘he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:28 lil5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s **offspring** or children. They are speaking and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:29 k9ws rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is speaking as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people, and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:29 czi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ θεῖον 1 Paul is using the adjective **Divine** as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
17:29 xfp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 Paul is referring to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:29 q4q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human **skill** and **imagination** but to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
17:29 gnk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
17:30 h8uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe **times** that were themselves ignorant but **times** when people were characterized by spiritual **ignorance**. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
17:30 qim5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
17:31 jt3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 Here the term **world** refers to the people who live in the world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
17:31 htp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by his own righteous standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17:31 ebve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 By **the man**, Paul implicitly means Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by Jesus, the man whom he has appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:31 l61p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστιν παρασχὼν πᾶσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **assurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having given everyone reason to believe surely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17:31 ulr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
17:32 j44o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
17:32 tc8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 By **We**, these philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
17:32 txre rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo καὶ πάλιν 1 It might seem that the expression **also again** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “again” or “another time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
17:32 c4sm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
17:32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 These are the people who were present at the Areopagus, listening to Paul.
17:32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
17:34 nb26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of what Paul did in Athens. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
17:34 nysg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τινὲς & ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of **Damaris** shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
17:34 hlgu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure κολληθέντες αὐτῷ, ἐπίστευσαν 1 The people Luke describes here **believed** before they were **joined** to Paul, so it might be more natural to put the information about them believing first. Alternate translation: “believed and were joined to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
17:34 vcx3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κολληθέντες αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “joining him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:34 psh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
17:34 hsz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δάμαρις 1 The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.\n- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.\n- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The baptism of John\n\nSome Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
18:1 fky7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
18:1 abcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:2 d9zx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ εὑρών 1 The word **found** does not mean that Paul was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “And when Paul happened to meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:2 hm16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jew** to introduce **Aquila** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there was a certain Jew there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
18:2 y97p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ποντικὸν 1 The word **Pontian** was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in [2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:2 q11b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
18:2 n95f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 The word **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:5 r56h 0 # General Information:\n\nSilas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
18:5 btkg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy **came down** to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:5 rjl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18:5 vwj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke speaks of **the word** as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
18:5 bsgm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:6 ncx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in [13:51](../13/51.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
18:6 z12a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **blood** represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:6 pacx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
18:6 ezpo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
18:6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads”
18:6 aq99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:7 v8xg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τινὸς & σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:7 vs6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 The words **Titius Justus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:8 lj2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κρίσπος 1 The word **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:8 zc89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
18:8 uaq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:8 t3np rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18:9 ws7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **fear** what people might do to him if he continues proclaiming the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Do not fear what people might do to you if you continue proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:9 l4yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
18:9 zg8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 The expressions **speak** and **do not be silent** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
18:9 a529 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:10 isn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:10 a8lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
18:11 a18w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:12 se8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 The word **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:12 f41k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 The word **Achaia** was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:12 j762 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
18:12 lp79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατεπέστησαν 1 Here the expression **rose up** means that the Jewish leaders took action, specifically to oppose Paul. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:12 rc85 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Jews in Corinth recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “all together”
18:12 u36c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα 1 The term **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio the governor sat when he made legal decisions in court. The implication is that the Jewish leaders wanted Gallio to judge and punish Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “brought him before the judgment seat so that the governor would judge and punish him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:13 xpnq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “This man Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:13 x23b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the Jewish leaders is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
18:13 il8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρὰ τὸν νόμον 1 By **the law**, the Jewish leaders implicitly mean “Roman law.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “contrary to Roman law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:14 uhyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα 1 Luke is referring to “speaking” by association with a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:14 cesw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
18:14 argm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἰ μὲν ἦν ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 Gallio is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing on Paul’s part that brought you here today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
18:14 psxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 The terms **crime** and **wrongdoing** mean similar things. Gallio using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “some serious crime” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
18:15 reg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Gallio is speaking as if what follows was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker knows that it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
18:15 aaql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγου 1 By **word**, Gallio likely means speech, expressed in words, as opposed to action. He is saying that what Paul has been saying is not a matter of great importance if he has not actually committed any crime. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:15 p0kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὀνομάτων 1 By **names**, Gallio likely means the question of whether Jesus can be called the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:15 ywpd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 Gallio is using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must see yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
18:15 royp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 By **see**, Gallio means investigate the matter and resolve it. Your language may have a similar idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “you must see to it yourselves” or “you must look into it yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:16 d6nh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:17 x9w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σωσθένην 1 The word **Sosthenes** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:17 ju3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke says in [18:8](../18/08.md) that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:17 mj77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:17 cyk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες & ἔτυπτον 1 Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
18:18 j0we rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς 1 Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
18:18 et8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:18 x25w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:18 kq6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Paul cut the hair off **his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut off his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
18:18 ceor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
18:18 cf3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add any information in your translation about why Paul made it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
18:18 c8z0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εὐχήν 1 This **vow** was a promise that a person in this culture made to God that he would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. A person might do this to express his sincerity about something he was praying for, to acknowledge something that God had done for him, or to consecrate himself to deeper devotion to God for a time. In your translation, you may be able to use the word for a comparable practice in your culture. Alternate translation: “made a special promise to God not to cut his hair for a time in order to be more devoted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
18:19 abcx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun **them** refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:19 eqi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατήντησαν & εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:20 u44s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐρωτώντων & αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:22 gyy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 Luke says that Paul had **come down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:22 bvw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναβὰς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **having gone up**. he means that Paul traveled to Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having gone up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:22 r26z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναβὰς 1 Luke says that Paul had **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:22 q9j6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Luke is saying **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:22 n3rh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατέβη 1 Luke says that Paul **went down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:23 plys rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν 1 Luke means that Paul visited **in succession** the churches in **the region of Galatia and Phrygia**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:23 s2hd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
18:24 xqy7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about **Apollos** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
18:24 n2b4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος & τις 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish man** to introduce **Apollos** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
18:24 gsal rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj Ἰουδαῖος 1 Luke is using the adjective **Jewish** as a noun to mean a person who is a Jew. ULT adds **man** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
18:24 di14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς 1 The word **Alexandrian** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:24 qn7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:24 bh25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 Luke is speaking of **Apollos** as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:25 ym5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐλάλει καὶ ἐδίδασκεν 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **speaking** tells how Apollos was **teaching** about Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he spoke, he taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
18:25 z7a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18:25 jj3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:25 jwol rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
18:25 ift8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:25 lr1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
18:26 ga6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:27 c2sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns βουλομένου & αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:27 ll36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Luke uses the expression **pass over** here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:27 v2i6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:27 f99p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18:28 mw2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δημοσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **public**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
19:intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there.\n- Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there.\n- Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made.\n\nActs [19:20](../19/20.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Temple of Artemis\n\nThe temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
19:1 lp23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke is using the phrase **And it happened that** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
19:1 rhv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη 1 Luke says that Paul traveled through **the upper parts** of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than did the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia ([18:23](../18/23.md)), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will ([18:21](../18/21.md)). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:1 munb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατελθεῖν εἰς 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
19:1 iosy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τινας μαθητάς 1 Luke is using the phrase **certain disciples** to introduce these believers as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there were already some believers in the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
19:2 wqi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε, πιστεύσαντες? 1 Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “And he asked them if they had received the Holy Spirit when they believed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
19:3 mrm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then what kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:3 jzp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 The believers in Ephesus are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
19:3 w76v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:4 g8iw Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα 1 Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism”
19:4 r46y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
19:5 k9st rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
19:5 ueh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:5 g2dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:6 gk8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 Paul **laid** his **hands** on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:17](../08/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
19:6 udyf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:6 j4n8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλάλουν & γλώσσαις 1 The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:7 e7kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
19:8 qv8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπαρρησιάζετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was speaking boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
19:8 yky2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **reasoning** tells how Paul was **persuading** people in the synagogue in Ephesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “reasonably persuading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
19:8 v8et rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
19:8 v5d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was teaching that the **kingdom of God** had begun on earth when Jesus came as the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “about how, when Jesus came as the Messiah, God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:9 mq1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **being hardened** tells how **some** in the Ephesus synagogue were **disobeying** what God wanted them to do, according to Paul’s teaching. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “stubbornly disobeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
19:9 yss2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσκληρύνοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were hardening themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:9 n6ir rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν ὁδὸν 1 As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:9 den4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Τυράννου 1 The word **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:10 cw5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people living throughout the province of Asia heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
19:10 t0ak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:10 n45g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
19:10 kj12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:11 abcy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
19:11 fa6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 Luke is using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
19:12 m3kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people even took handkerchiefs or aprons from Paul’s skin to the sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:12 vc1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 This could mean implicitly: (1) that these were cloth items that others had placed on Paul’s **skin**. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that had touched Paul’s skin” (2) that these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that Paul had worn or used” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:12 aks4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σουδάρια 1 These **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:12 xs31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σιμικίνθια 1 These **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:12 kw9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
19:12 nl3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** as if they were living thing that could depart from a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
19:13 he2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δέ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
19:13 fgq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐξορκιστῶν 1 These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:13 s12u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:13 vqt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 The exorcists are referring to Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:14 cwzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
19:14 emgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἦσαν & τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
19:14 cb8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 The word **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:15 fhzn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθὲν & τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
19:15 lrky rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By **the evil spirit**, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:15 nsl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
19:15 vqwh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς & τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
19:16 lu7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀμφοτέρων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:17 mx62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
19:17 jodu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:17 fd5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
19:17 h0lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:17 w1su rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
19:17 j85h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:17 j2hh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:18 v9ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **declaring** tells how these believers were **confessing** the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
19:19 i31a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὰ περίεργα 1 Luke is using the adjective **magical** as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word **arts** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
19:19 z9rj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς βίβλους 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:19 u9pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might say something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
19:19 bcv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
19:20 es71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 Luke is speaking of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
19:20 lbg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:20 t49m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
19:21 de4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
19:21 q18b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὡς & ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι & πορεύεσθαι 1 The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
19:21 rdz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 In this context, the word **see** means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
19:22 cy6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἔραστον 1 The word **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:23 nb3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
19:23 rwf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:24 cg16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τις & ἀργυροκόπος & παρείχετο 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain silversmith** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
19:24 opb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δημήτριος 1 The word **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:24 y5ae rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background τις & ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
19:24 wg95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
19:24 nwt7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀργυροκόπος 1 A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:24 p58m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
19:25 f8rm οὓς συναθροίσας καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας, εἶπεν 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He gathered together the craftsmen, along with workers in similar occupations, and said”
19:25 w1xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 1 Luke is using the adjective **such** as a noun to mean a certain kind of work. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “in similar occupations” or “who did similar crafts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
19:26 rm6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε 1 Demetrius is referring to perception by naming the two major means of perception. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you perceive clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
19:26 rx32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 Demetrius is speaking as if Paul had physically **removed** a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:26 z7e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 Demetrius is using one part of the artisans, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which people make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
19:27 j3bb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people will consider the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:27 hz7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom people from all over the province of Asia and the world worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
19:27 aq5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:28 t4lm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔκραζον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
19:28 uc5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 Luke is speaking of the craftsmen as if they were containers that **anger** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:29 t7xs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “confusion filled the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]);
19:29 u42d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 Luke is speaking of **the city** as if they was a container that **confusion** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:29 u51d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confusion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
19:29 ej3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸ θέατρον 1 The **theater** in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:29 d6r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γάϊον & Ἀρίσταρχον 1 The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:31 o6qt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν 1 The word **Asiarchs** is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:31 we87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & παρεκάλουν & ἑαυτὸν 1 The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
19:31 r183 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 The expression **to give himself** means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
19:33 ukaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον 1 The implication is that some people **instructed Alexander** about how he could speak to everyone in the theater. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:33 jr85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 The word **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:33 j1mi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 This likely means that Alexander was **waving his hand** to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
19:33 tlq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ 1 The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:34 tyx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐπιγνόντες & ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν, 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
19:34 u1hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς & κραζόντων 1 Luke is speaking as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
19:35 sy9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 This **city clerk** was a high official in the government of Ephesus. He was not merely someone who kept records. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “an alderman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:35 n4qz φησίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
19:35 gox9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
19:35 mtsc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τίς γάρ ἐστιν 1 The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
19:35 sd3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
19:35 k8dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
19:35 gqr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
19:35 zzmv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
19:35 hiw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 The term **temple keeper** was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
19:35 afd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 The city clerk is using the adjective **Zeus-fallen** as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word **image** to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that this rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
19:35 fdfk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
19:36 o0ul rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατεσταλμένους ὑπάρχειν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to calm down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:36 xj2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 The city clerk means implicitly that it would be **rash** for the people to do anything to harm Gaius and Aristarchus, as he says in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to act impulsively and hurt the two men you have brought here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:36 s67q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative adjective **rash**. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
19:37 cuhh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
19:37 s8a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 The pronoun **these** refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
19:38 zkx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 The city clerk is using the term **word** to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:38 i14r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:38 szf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:38 o1vf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
19:38 g8tp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 The pronoun **them** refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
19:39 hxh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 The word **seek** does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
19:39 wga5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:39 dsmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
19:39 et5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. In your translation, you could use a term for a comparable deliberative body in your culture. Alternate translation: “the town meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
19:40 sds7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, the context suggests that it would be the Roman authorities. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
19:40 efat rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is leaving out a word that a sentence would ordinarily need in Greek in order to be complete. The clerk is abbreviating the expression “the today day,” which means “this day.” You can say that in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “this day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
19:40 up3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is referring to the events that were nearly a riot, by association with the day on which they took place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the events of this day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19:40 jtdu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδενὸς αἰτίου ὑπάρχοντος, περὶ οὗ οὐ δυνησόμεθα ἀποδοῦναι λόγον 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there being no cause about which we will not be able to give an account.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “because we would have to have a reason in order to give an account” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
20:intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nIn this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Race\n\nPaul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])\n\n### “Compelled by the Spirit”\n\nPaul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
20:2 edb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the **regions** of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:3 ah5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:3 bdq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom γνώμης τοῦ ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας. 1 The expression **of a resolution** means that Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved to return through Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
20:3 jypq αὐτῷ & μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν 1 Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
20:4 dw6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σώπατρος Πύρρου & Σεκοῦνδος, & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος 1 These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:4 dpyn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Σώπατρος Πύρρου 1 Here, the possessive form indicates that **Sopater** is the son of **Pyrrhus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
20:4 w4n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βεροιαῖος & Θεσσαλονικέων & Δερβαῖος & Ἀσιανοὶ 1 The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:4 w8j6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀρίσταρχος & Γάϊος 1 The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:5 y35x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Luke begins to use the pronouns **us** and **we** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words throughout this chapter if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
20:5 gb5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:5 o1bl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:6 l5dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:7 xsyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular day of the **week**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
20:7 wpfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the believers met on **the first of the week** because that was the day Jesus rose from the dead. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week, when Jesus rose from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:7 tgsb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνηγμένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:7 ls6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:7 zff8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:7 ckiy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:7 j888 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:8 t6on rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦσαν & λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:8 ak8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
20:8 cshh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:9 ju64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:9 v5q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
20:9 tsp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:9 abcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 Luke is speaking of **sleep** as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
20:9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 In this culture, the **third story** meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two stories above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers.
20:9 jp89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:9 z1wf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they lifted him from the ground, but he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:10 uban rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:10 gfol rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ & ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Paul is speaking as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:11 w5w8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 Luke could be using the words **broken** and **tasted** to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:11 upkb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:11 av7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:12 lih8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of Eutychus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
20:12 jkj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν παῖδα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the boy**, he means Eutychus. You can use his name if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Eutychus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:12 pk6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεκλήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this comforted them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:12 abx0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
20:13 w4ew rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμεῖς δὲ, προελθόντες ἐπὶ τὸ πλοῖον, ἀνήχθημεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἆσσον, ἐκεῖθεν μέλλοντες ἀναλαμβάνειν τὸν Παῦλον; οὕτως γὰρ διατεταγμένος, ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Paul intended to go on foot to Assos and he arranged for us to take him on board there, so we went ahead to the ship and sailed away to Assos” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
20:13 q4yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 The word **Assos** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:13 nq2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 In light of what Paul says in [20:23](../20/23.md), that the Holy Spirit was showing him that he would soon suffer and be imprisoned, the implication seems to be that Paul wanted to **go on foot himself** so that he could be alone for a while and reflect and pray. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “intending to go on foot himself because he wanted to have some time alone to reflect and pray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:14 ju8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 The word **Mitylene** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:15 bbeq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν 1 Luke says that he and his traveling companions **came down** to a point on the mainland **opposite Chios** because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
20:15 ulk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Χίου 1 The word **Chios** is the name of an island in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:15 b6c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σάμον 1 The word **Samos** is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:15 s7g2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μίλητον 1 The word **Miletus** is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20:16 p61e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 Luke is speaking about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could **lose**. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:17 nw52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns μετεκαλέσατο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:18 xsa6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε ἀπὸ πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀφ’ ἧς ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν, πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην 1 It may be more natural in your language to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You yourselves know how I was with you the whole time from the first day from which I set foot in Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
20:18 b6li rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You certainly know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:18 vw6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 Paul is using one part of himself, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:19 uidc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
20:19 llqj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great humility” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
20:19 pg86 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **humility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very humbly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20:19 wh5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:19 e6k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and how I endured the trials that happened to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:19 y5iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:20 sscz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **nothing** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
20:20 nu7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative particle **not**. Alternate translation: “how I eagerly brought forth everything that would be useful so that I could declare it to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
20:21 sqf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διαμαρτυρόμενος & τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:21 w7mv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about the need to repent towards God and believe in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20:21 x552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **our** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
20:22 hcs0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:22 vam4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:22 n99n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:22 um41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
20:22 a9j1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
20:23 u26j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
20:23 q3ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δεσμὰ 1 Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire experience of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:24 cvw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐδενὸς λόγου ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean what he might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I do not consider my life to have any value for myself worth speaking of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:24 ga6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 The terms **race** and **ministry** mean the same thing; **race** is figurative and **ministry** is literal. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could show how the second term is the literal equivalent of the first. Alternate translation: “to finish my race, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
20:24 m5gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **ministry** that Jesus gave him were a **race** he was running. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete my assignment, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:24 ljgc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If you decide to use a plain expression rather than the figurative expression **race**, you could also use another way to express the emphasis that Paul is conveying by using two similar terms together. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
20:24 w8d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul is speaking about this **race** and **ministry** as if they were objects that Jesus gave him and he **received**. He means that Jesus commanded him to do this ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that the Lord Jesus commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:24 hg3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the good news that God graciously saves those who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20:25 kj9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:25 l59w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν βασιλείαν 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will understand that by **kingdom** he means the kingdom of God. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:25 aur9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν βασιλείαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God has begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20:25 cq45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 Paul is using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:26 rab4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ 1 This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
20:26 e546 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:26 rs87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they would receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:27 g1vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Paul is giving the reason why he is not responsible for any spiritual punishment the people in Ephesus might receive. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 26–27. It might say something like this: “I did not hold back from declaring all the counsel of God to you. Therefore I testify to you this very day that I am innocent of the blood of all of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
20:27 qa9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι & ὑμῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold back**. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
20:27 jl2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
20:28 u52d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is speaking as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and the elders to whom he is speaking were their shepherds. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers whose leaders the Holy Spirit has made you, to care for the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:28 hjh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 Paul is referring to death by association with the way people may shed their **blood** when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the church of God, which he obtained through his own death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:28 cx69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 The word translated **obtained** means to make something one’s own. The pronoun **he** may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
20:28 r66x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective **own** as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
20:28 ybzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:29 ka6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται & λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are **vicious wolves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:30 cbq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 1 Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “From within your very own group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
20:30 esme rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦντες διεστραμμένα 1 In this context, **arise** means to take action to get an enterprise under way, not to get up from a sitting or lying position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men will begin to speak perverted things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:30 yn8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διεστραμμένα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:30 ftf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically **draw away** people **after them** as they themselves left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follow their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:31 hs1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **stop**. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
20:31 rvh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:31 rt1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
20:31 fc3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Paul says **night and day** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
20:32 zvz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ, τῷ δυναμένῳ 1 Paul is speaking of the **word** of God’s **grace** as if it were a living thing that was **able** to do the things he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to God who, through the word of his grace, is able” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
20:32 ylm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message about God’s **grace** that Jesus and his apostles shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the message about his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:32 tbeo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the message about how God has graciously saved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
20:32 s7rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 Paul is speaking as if these believers were a wall or building or other structure and the **word** of God’s **grace** was making them higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you more confident and mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:32 x5jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 Paul is speaking as if the blessings that God gives believers were money or property that a child inherits from a father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:32 sdlc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God has sanctified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:33 yw8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 The implication is that Paul did not desire any of these things and did not try to get them by charging for his ministry to the Ephesians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I did not insist on being paid for my work” or “I did not try to become wealthy by teaching you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:33 o5jp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **no one** and the negative word **coveted**. Alternate translation: “I served you freely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
20:33 yl6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου 1 Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** and **gold** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:33 ipq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ 1 In this culture, owning expensive **clothing** was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
20:34 f5a3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
20:34 ja5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ταῖς χρείαις μου & ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 Paul is speaking of his **hands** as if they were a living thing that **ministered** to his **needs**, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
20:34 izuu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:35 zibu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι & δεῖ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:35 pvrm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντα & ὅτι & δεῖ 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently, that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
20:35 b6o1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
20:35 d1bh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might **take hold** of a person who was **weak** to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:35 tr1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν 1 Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
20:35 ps2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **words** to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:35 mj5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
20:36 u3uc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ 1 Paul knelt down as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
20:37 pb4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 The expression **falling upon** means that the Ephesian elders put their arms around Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “embracing Paul” or “putting their arms around Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
20:37 sze4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in this culture. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “they were kissing him on the cheek to express their brotherly love for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
20:38 npay rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20:38 bs3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20:38 m0wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he had spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
21:intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nActs 21:1–19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20–26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.\n\nThe last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “They are all determined to keep the law”\n\nThe Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.\n\n### Nazarite vow\n\nThe vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).\n\n### Gentiles in the temple\n\nThe Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
21:1 s3h3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἤλθομεν 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
21:1 a428 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:1 e5y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κῶ 1 The word **Cos** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:1 p6ss rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ῥόδον 1 The word **Rhodes** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea south of Cos. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:1 x7kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πάταρα 1 The word **Patara** is the name of a city on the southwest coast of Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:2 nz9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην 1 Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **crossing over** the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
21:3 vkr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 The expression **leaving it behind on the port side** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:3 a429 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:3 a430 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε & τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
21:3 hwx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
21:4 y35m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:4 a431 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
21:5 a432 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὅτε & ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **finished**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:5 a433 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 Luke says **everyone** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:5 q8xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
21:6 a434 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:7 hy6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ἐμείναμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
21:7 z4nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:7 ff1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:8 ay52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the Seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:8 vi48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 Luke is using the title **evangelist** to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase preceded by a comma in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, a man known for proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics]])
21:9 cv8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the **daughters** of Philip that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
21:9 rcf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτῳ & ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες 1 The pronoun **this** refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:10 n3i8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants κατῆλθέν τις & προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain prophet** to introduce **Agabus** as a returning participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing returning participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a prophet named Agabus who came down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
21:10 f9cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἅγαβος 1 The word **Agabus** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:10 a435 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατῆλθέν τις ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 Luke says that Agabus **came down** from Judea because that province is higher in elevation than Caesarea. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “arrived from up in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:11 a436 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου, δήσας ἑαυτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας 1 Agabus bound his own feet and hands with Paul’s belt as a symbolic action to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having taken the belt of Paul and bound his own feet and hands to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
21:11 nq2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that in this way the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt and that they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
21:11 i8u7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
21:11 s92d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the custody of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:11 b59g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Gentiles**, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
21:12 a437 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ ἐντόπιοι 1 Luke is using the adjective **locals** as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
21:12 a438 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 Luke means implicitly that this **urging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:12 a439 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:13 uwt2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
21:13 bj76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally **breaking** his **heart**. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:13 k34w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 In this context, the **heart** represents the emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:13 p5e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not only for them to bind me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:13 q35x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to the Lord Jesus” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:14 hwc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ πειθομένου & αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were not persuading him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:14 zl98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ πειθομένου 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand what he and the others were not persuading Paul about. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was not being persuaded not to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:14 as1i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May the will of the Lord happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
21:15 a440 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνεβαίνομεν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Luke says that he and his traveling companions **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring in your language to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:16 k9kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain early disciple** to introduce **Mnason** as a new participant in the story. The phrase **early disciple** introduces him as one of the first people to believe in Jesus. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a Cypriot who was one of the first believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
21:16 zd9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μνάσωνί & Κυπρίῳ 1 The word **Mnason** is the name of a man. The word **Cypriot** is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:16 a441 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:17 d3gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοί 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:20 a1hk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & ἐδόξαζον & εἶπόν & αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **they** refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:20 a442 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θεωρεῖς 1 Paul does not physically **see** these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:20 xki4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφέ 1 James and the elders using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Since this expression occurs in direct discourse, you may want to preserve it in your translation to show how these believers addressed one another. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:20 c5pu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑπάρχουσιν 1 In this instance the pronoun **they** refers to the believing Jews whom James and the elders are describing. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these believing Jews are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:20 a443 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες ζηλωταὶ τοῦ νόμου ὑπάρχουσιν 1 James and the elders say **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they are very zealous for the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:21 pyg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατηχήθησαν & περὶ σοῦ 1 James and the elders mean implicitly that people **have been told** this about Paul even though it is not true. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even though it is not true, they have been told about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:21 e5s4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατηχήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:21 sdl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with **Moses**, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:21 a444 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **apostasy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21:21 knt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:21 u56t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:22 a445 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
21:22 a446 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 James and the elders are using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
21:23 b28b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λέγομεν 1 As the General Notes to this chapter indicate, by **we**, James and the elders mean themselves but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
21:23 b22r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εὐχὴν ἔχοντες 1 See how you translated the term **vow** in [18:18](../18/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
21:23 a447 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν 1 Some ancient manuscripts read **from themselves.** That would be indicating that these men made the vow on their own initiative. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “upon themselves.” That would be indicating that the men still needed to fulfill the commitment implicit in the vow to make an offering in the temple at the end of the time during which the conditions of the vow were in effect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
21:24 km4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 James and the elders assume that Paul will know that in order to make an offering at the end of the time of their vows, these men will need to be made ceremonially clean so that they can go into the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “be purified with them so that you can all go to the temple area together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:24 a448 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἁγνίσθητι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “participate in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:24 c3ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 James and the elders assume that Paul will know that the **expenses** at the end of a vow included buying a male and female lamb, a ram, grain, and wine for offerings. They also assume that Paul will know that the Jews considered paying such expenses for those who could not afford them to be an act of great piety. Alternate translation: “piously help them buy the animals and foods they will need for offerings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:24 abq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν 1 The men would cut the hair off **their heads** to show that he had fulfilled the vows that they had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. See how you translated it in [18:18](../18/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
21:24 a449 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν 1 Even though James and the elders are using the future tense, they are actually stating the purpose for which Paul would be purified with these four men and pay their expenses. Use a natural way in your language for expressing a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that they may shear their heads” or “so that they will be able to shear their heads to show that they have fulfilled their vows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
21:24 a450 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέν ἐστιν 1 The expression **there is nothing in** these things means that they are not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things they have been told about you are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:24 nu9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:24 a451 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον 1 James and the elders are using the word **yourself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
21:25 a452 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
21:25 bpb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν 1 James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
21:25 wjd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν 1 James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:25 nu0i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:26 cr14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 Luke implicitly means the four **men** who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:26 a453 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἁγνισθεὶς 1 Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:26 s8z9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἁγνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having participated in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:26 xu9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερόν 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:26 a454 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 Luke is using the possessive form **the days of purification** to mean the days during which the men’s vows were in effect, at the end of which there needed to be a **purification** ceremony. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
21:26 a455 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **purification**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21:26 pvy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 In this case Luke is referring implicitly to a separate **purification** process from the one the men fulfilled in order to enter the temple area. He means the purification process that came at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of the days of purification at the end of their vows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:26 gc23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ἡ προσφορά 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until each one of them offered an offering for himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:27 j9zm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he means the **seven days** that were customarily required for the offerings and purification ceremony at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the seven days that it took to purify these men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:27 a456 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke implicitly means some **Jews from Asia** who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival, as described in [20:16](../20/16.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:27 k4l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:27 a457 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 Luke says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making many people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:27 a458 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ὄχλον 1 By the **crowd**, Luke implicitly means the crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem from all over the Roman Empire for the Pentecost festival. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:27 mks6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest or detain someone, by association with the way that arresting officers or concerned citizens might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they held onto him” or “they detained him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:28 a459 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:28 a460 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντας πανταχῇ 1 The Jews from Asia are saying **all** and **everywhere** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:28 sfg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου 1 The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that they are referring to the special status of the people of Israel as God’s chosen people, the law of Moses, and the temple in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and the law of Moses and this temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:28 jc9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem **temple** and that they are accusing Paul of bringing **Greeks** into those areas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “into areas of the temple courtyard where they are not allowed to go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:28 a461 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερὸν 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:29 t2z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid their hands on him, shouting, ‘Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
21:29 h1uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Τρόφιμον 1 The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:30 st3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:30 upl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:30 a462 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:30 a463 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:30 mmaa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:30 xd6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 The implication is that the gatekeepers **shut** the **doors** to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:31 a464 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ζητούντων τε αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the mob, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as the mob was seeking to kill Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:31 d6vt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 Luke is speaking of this **report** as if they were a living thing that **came up to the commander** on its own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
21:31 hu5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 Luke uses the phrase **came up ** because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard up in the temple fortress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:31 p85a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 A **chiliarch** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 1,000 soldiers. A **cohort** was a large military guard unit. Alternate translation: “to the commander of the military guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
21:31 u65r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Here, the word **Jerusalem** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:31 zgas rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were very agitated” or “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were rioting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:31 a465 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “something was greatly agitating the people who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:32 j81t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς ἐξαυτῆς παραλαβὼν στρατιώτας καὶ ἑκατοντάρχας, κατέδραμεν ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the chiliarch (the Roman commander), and the pronoun **them** refer to the people who were rioting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The commander immediately took soldiers and centurions and ran down to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:32 e4rj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἑκατοντάρχας 1 A **centurion** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. See how you translated it in [10:1](../10/01.md). Alternate translation: “their commanding officers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
21:33 xd9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι ἁλύσεσι δυσί 1 These means implicitly that the commander ordered his soldiers to chain Paul to one soldier on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “commanded him to be chained to one soldier on each side of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:33 zi4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:33 y6zw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was asking, ‘Who is this? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
21:33 fi22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπυνθάνετο 1 Luke means implicitly that the commander **was asking** the people in the crowd these questions, not that he was asking them of Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was asking the people in the crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:34 k35e rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to the commander, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander … Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:34 a466 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth about Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
21:34 qcc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:35 h9n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers carried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:35 a467 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν βίαν τοῦ ὄχλου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **violence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the crowd was so violent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21:36 kax6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism αἶρε αὐτόν 1 The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a mild way of referring to this in your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
21:37 j9xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μέλλων & εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress, Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:37 a468 ὁ Παῦλος λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said”
21:37 a469 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ? 1 Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
21:37 p5cd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
21:38 xx2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the 4,000 men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
21:38 p2ym rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate τῶν σικαρίων 1 The term **Sicarii** is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
21:39 a470 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ταρσεὺς 1 The word **Tarsian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:39 a471 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
21:39 a139 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase **I ask of you** shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
21:40 qp2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος & αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:40 rk1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
22:intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “In the Hebrew language”\n\nMost Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.\n\n### “The Way”\n\nNo one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen.
22:1 lrs0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:1 xe46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is using the word **fathers** to refer either to Jewish leaders who may be present or to Jewish men who are older than he is. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” or “My fellow Israelites young and old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:1 pe8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen as I explain myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
22:2 a472 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον παρέσχον ἡσυχίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they became even more quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
22:3 a473 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γεγεννημένος ἐν Ταρσῷ τῆς Κιλικίας 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a native of Tarsus of Cilicia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:3 d4dx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος 1 Paul is using the phrase **at the feet** to refer to Gamaliel himself by association with the way a student in this culture would sit at the feet of a teacher (that is, on the ground in front of a teacher) while learning from him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but educated in this city by Gamaliel, instructed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:3 g311 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could state this using active forms. It may be helpful to begin new sentences here. Alternate translation: “However, Gamaliel educated me in this city. He instructed me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:3 b1dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γαμαλιήλ 1 The word **Gamaliel** is the name of the man who was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law at this time. See how you translated his name in [5:34](../05/34.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
22:3 iz4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strictness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the most strict interpretation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
22:3 lqk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πατρῴου 1 Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way that all of you are today”
22:4 dr8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα ἄχρι θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who persecuted this Way to the point of killing those who belonged to it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
22:4 a474 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς & ἐδίωξα 1 Paul is using the pronoun **who** to refer to himself. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I persecuted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
22:4 jy3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 Here, **this Way** represents the people who belonged to the group called the Way. Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to the group called the Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:4 bk4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
22:5 v2km rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness μαρτυρεῖ μοι 1 Paul is speaking politely of the high priest as if it may be assumed that he will willingly testify to what he knows to be true. Use a form in your language that implicitly suggests good will on the part of someone. Alternate translation: “will tell you about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
22:5 a475 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ πρεσβυτέριον 1 Paul is referring to the Sanhedrin by association with the way it was composed of the elders of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:5 in72 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:5 y82b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄξων & τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 If your language does not use the passive form **bound**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to bind those who were there and bring them back to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:5 ht9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that they might receive punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:6 w4l7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
22:7 a476 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “someone addressing me by name and asking me why I was persecuting him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:7 d6nd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 Paul is using one part of this speaker, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
22:7 a477 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
22:8 a478 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:8 a479 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε 1 Paul was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
22:9 h95h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν & φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand,” since Luke says in [9:7](../09/07.md) that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:10 a480 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:10 a91a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σοι λαληθήσεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:10 a481 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν τέτακταί 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:11 n1kb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because that light was so bright” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
22:11 qyf0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the ones being with me leading me by the hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:11 a482 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “I went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
22:12 a17q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς 1 Paul is using the phrase **a certain devout man** to introduce **Ananias** as a new participant in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
22:12 e7uw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom all the Jews there attested” or “of whom all the Jews there spoke well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:13 a483 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπέν μοι, Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ, ἀνάβλεψον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “addressed me as a brother and told me to look up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:13 un4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 Ananias was using the word **brother** as a title for **Saul**. The two men were not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias was already addressing Saul as someone who shared the same faith. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word “brother” is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:13 a484 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀνάβλεψον 1 In one sense, this was not a command that Paul was capable of obeying, since he could not see. Instead, it was a command that directly caused him to be healed, if he would **look up** as if he could see. Alternate translation: “if you look up, you will be able to see” or see next note for another possibility. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
22:13 x3kc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνάβλεψον 1 The expression **look up** can also mean “see again,” that is, to have one’s sight restored. If this is the meaning, then Ananias was telling Paul what Jesus was going to do for him. Alternate translation: “Jesus is restoring your sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:13 se47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right at that instant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:13 x4s0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κἀγὼ & ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν 1 Paul means implicitly that when he **looked up** at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:14 a485 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:14 a486 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:14 a487 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸν Δίκαιον 1 Ananias is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun to mean a particular person who is righteous. ULT adds the word **one** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the One who is righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
22:14 a488 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν Δίκαιον 1 Ananias is referring to the Messiah by association with the way the Messiah was **Righteous**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:14 dg8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 It might seem that the expression **the voice from his own mouth** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “his own voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
22:15 a489 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι ἔσῃ μάρτυς αὐτῷ πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους, ὧν ἑώρακας καὶ ἤκουσας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation, continuing from the previous verse: “because I would be a witness for him to all men of what I had seen and heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:15 i5q8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Ananias was using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
22:16 a490 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ νῦν τί μέλλεις? ἀναστὰς, βάπτισαι καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου, ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He asked me why I was delaying, and he told me to arise and be baptized and wash away my sins, calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:16 bhg9 καὶ νῦν 1 Here, **now** does not mean “at this moment”; Ananias is using the term to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So listen”
22:16 a491 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that Ananias wanted Paul to take action, not that he wanted him to stand up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Come on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:16 lt2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βάπτισαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:16 zr5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 Ananias is speaking as if Paul could literally **wash away** his **sins**. He is using a word picture to convey his meaning. He means that just as washing one’s body removes dirt, if Paul repents and asks Jesus for forgiveness, Jesus releases him from the guilt and power sin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to show that you are asking Jesus to free you from sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:16 g5dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “calling on him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:16 a492 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 By **his name**, Ananias implicitly means the name of Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:17 its2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
22:18 a493 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι, σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει ἐξ Ἰερουσαλήμ, διότι οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I saw him telling me to hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem because they would not accept my testimony about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:18 jy2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
22:18 a494 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει 1 The expressions **Hurry** and **in haste** mean similar things. Jesus was using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Go away as fast as you can” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
22:19 a495 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes κἀγὼ εἶπον, Κύριε, αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται ὅτι ἐγὼ ἤμην φυλακίζων καὶ δέρων κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς, τοὺς πιστεύοντας ἐπὶ σέ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I told the Lord that they themselves knew that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues those who believed in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:19 q5cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 The pronouns **they themselves** refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews here in Jerusalem who do not believe in you know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
22:19 im4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 Paul is adding the word **themselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “they know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
22:20 a496 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ὅτε ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἤμην ἐφεστὼς, καὶ συνευδοκῶν, καὶ φυλάσσων τὰ ἱμάτια τῶν ἀναιρούντων αὐτόν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I told him that when the blood of Stephen his witness was spilled, I myself was also standing by and agreeing and guarding the outer garments of the ones killing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:20 udrd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, recall from chapter 7 that it was the enemies of Stephen. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness spilled his blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:20 y7t1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 Paul is referring to Stephen’s death by association with the way his **blood** was **spilled** when his enemies killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:21 a497 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν πρός με, πορεύου, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἰς ἔθνη μακρὰν ἐξαποστελῶ σε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he told me to go because he would send me far away to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
22:22 a498 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τούτου τοῦ λόγου 1 This could mean: (1) that the crowd became upset when they heard the specific **word** “Gentiles.” Alternate translation: “they heard the word ‘Gentiles’” (2) that the term **word** means what Paul said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul says this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:22 a499 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες 1 Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Jerusalem literally **lifted up** its **voice**. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:22 a500 τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of “lifting up a voice” but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices”
22:22 ta8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 The crowd is referring to Paul’s death by association with the way they would **remove** him **from the earth** if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:22 a501 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν 1 The crowd meant implicitly that it was **not right** for Paul to **live** even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:23 b6a7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια 1 When the people in the crowd removed their outer garments, this was at least a symbolic action indicating that they felt they should stone Paul to death. They took off their long robes as they would have done in order to throw stones at Paul more easily. But some of the people may actually have intended to try to stone Paul even though he was in the custody of the Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “casting off their outer garments as if they were going to throw stones at Paul to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
22:23 a502 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα 1 This could mean: (1) that the people in the crowd were **throwing dust into the air** to symbolize how they wanted to throw stones at Paul, who was on the steps above them. Alternate translation: “throwing dust into the air as if they were throwing stones at Paul” (2) that the people in the crowd were doing this to demonstrate how angry they were. Alternate translation: “angrily throwing dust into the air” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
22:24 h6gp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν & εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:24 sth6 τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [21:34](../21/34.md).
22:24 og3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:24 pz47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 The commander did not want **scourges** to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments, **scourges**, that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:24 a503 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μάστιξιν 1 The term **scourges** describes leathern thongs that had small pieces of metal attached to them to inflict more damage. Your language may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “by whips” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
22:25 ar63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns προέτειναν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers who were going to whip Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
22:25 a504 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν ἑστῶτα ἑκατόνταρχον ὁ Παῦλος, εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the centurion who was standing by whether it was lawful for him and his soliders to scourge a man who was a Roman and had not been condemned.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
22:25 yjw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Paul is using the question form to challenge the right of the centurion and his soldiers to whip him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman citizen and who is uncondemned!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
22:25 a505 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον 1 In this context, the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “a man who is a Roman citizen and who has not been condemned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:26 pca7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 The centurion is using the question form to warn the commander that he should not have Paul whipped. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
22:26 a506 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 The centurion is speaking of the commander, one person who was involved in having Paul whipped, to mean everyone who was involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
22:26 a507 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ῥωμαῖός 1 As in the previous verse, here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:27 pe31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & ὁ 1 The pronouns **them**, **him**, and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
22:28 dr2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 The commander is saying implicitly that he does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:28 r79c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **citizenship**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying a large sum of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
22:28 a508 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
22:28 rly1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed have been a citizen since birth” or “I indeed inherited citizenship from my father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:29 a509 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφοβήθη 1 The implication is that the commander **was afraid** that the higher Roman authorities would punish him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:30 a510 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
22:30 kx58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection of the dead\n\nThe Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])\n\n### “Called a curse”\n\nSome Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Whitewash\n\nThis is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:1 lrs1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23:1 lrs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:1 nn2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
23:2 yz4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 **Ananias** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in [5:1](../05/01.md) and [9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
23:2 a565 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα 1 Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his **mouth** that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
23:3 igq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 Paul is referring to the way a **wall** can be painted white to make it look clean. Paul was suggesting that, in the same way, Ananias appeared to look morally innocent, but he was really full of evil intent. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you who pretend to be good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:3 un7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion καὶ σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 Paul is using the question form to challenge Ananias for what he has done. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not sit judging me by the law while acting contrary to the law by commanding me to be struck!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
23:3 m6nb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “command someone to strike me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:4 lkh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 The men standing by Paul are using the question form to rebuke him for saying what he said. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not insult the high priest of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
23:5 a511 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:5 a512 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται γὰρ, ὅτι ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “For it is written that we should not speak evil of a ruler of our people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
23:5 e8lg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται γὰρ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:5 a513 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must not speak evil of a ruler of your people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
23:6 a514 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸ ἓν μέρος 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one part of the council” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
23:6 a515 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23:6 pbe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:6 as3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor υἱὸς Φαρισαίων 1 By **son**, Paul means both that he is the literal son of a Pharisee and that he is the descendant of a line of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23:6 a516 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **resurrection** describes what the Pharisees had **hope** for. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “the hope of the resurrection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
23:6 iz18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the hope that God will make the dead alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23:6 dchr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
23:6 ys5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:8 gl1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background γὰρ 1 Luke uses the word **For** to introduce background information about the **Sadducees** and **Pharisees** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
23:8 a517 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there is no resurrection and that there are no angels and no spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
23:8 lrs2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ἀμφότερα 1 By **both**, Luke means implicitly that Pharisees believe in (1) the resurrection and (2) angels and spirits. You could indicate this explicitly if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “both that there is a resurrection and that there are angels and spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:9 a519 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναστάντες 1 By **arising** (that is, standing up), these Pharisees were indicating that they had something important to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
23:9 ayr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 These Pharisees are speaking as if what they are saying is a hypothetical possibility, but they believe that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
23:9 a520 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 These Pharisees assume that the Sadducees will understand that they mean this spirit or angel **spoke** to Paul when he had the vision in the Jerusalem temple that he described in [22:17–21](../22/17.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel, when he had his vision in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:9 a521 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος? 1 These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
23:10 f568 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they tear Paul apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:10 tqhu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole μὴ διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 Luke is making an overstatement here to emphasize the danger that Paul was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “lest they cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
23:11 i9w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ & ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 This expression indicates the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23:11 a522 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
23:11 r4q4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι 1 Jesus assumes that Paul will know that he means Paul will **testify** about him in Rome. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:12 a523 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
23:12 g3sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς 1 The implication is that the curse was, “May God do so to us if we eat or drink until we have killed Paul,” that is, “May God kill us.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “asked God to kill them if they did not do what they swore to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:12 a524 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγοντες μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωσιν τὸν Παῦλον 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘We will neither eat or drink until we have killed Paul’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
23:14 a525 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 It might seem that the expression **cursed ourselves with a curse** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “cursed ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
23:14 a526 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι 1 Since the men actually swore that they would **eat** or drink nothing, they are using one part of their oath to represent all of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat and drink nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
23:15 u8xm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 By **we**, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
23:15 a527 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἐμφανίσατε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
23:16 a531 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκούσας & τὴν ἐνέδραν 1 Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the **ambush**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:16 w6fe rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or “the nephew of Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
23:17 a528 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἄπαγε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please take” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
23:18 abd0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ & παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
23:18 lrs3 φησίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
23:19 a530 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 The chiliarch **taking hold** of the **hand** of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a **private** location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
23:20 uv6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, **The Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
23:21 a532 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σὺ & μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:21 a533 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 By the word **promise**, Paul’s nephew is referring to the commander agreeing to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin the next day and actually bringing him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:22 a534 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations παραγγείλας, μηδενὶ ἐκλαλῆσαι ὅτι ταῦτα ἐνεφάνισας πρὸς ἐμέ 1 Here Luke begins an indirect quotation but finishes it as a direct quotation. It may be more natural in your language for the entire quotation to be either indirect or direct. Alternate translation: “commanding him to tell no one that he had reported these things to him” or “commanding him, ‘Tell no one that you have reported these things to me’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
23:23 mgi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 Alternate translation: “200 soldiers who are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
23:23 kg8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός 1 In your translation, you may wish to express this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock this evening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
23:24 a535 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations κτήνη τε παραστῆσαι, ἵνα ἐπιβιβάσαντες τὸν Παῦλον, διασώσωσι πρὸς Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα, 1 Here Luke finishes as an indirect quotation the direct quotation that began in the previous verse. It may be more natural in your language to continue and finish the quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “and provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
23:24 a536 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διασώσωσι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, horsemen, and spearmen described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these troops may bring him safely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
23:24 av3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φήλικα 1 The word **Felix** is the name of the man who was the Roman **governor** of Judea at this time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
23:25 a537 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γράψας ἐπιστολὴν 1 Luke means implicitly that the commander gave the instructions described in the previous two verses by “summoning” two centurions and **writing** the letter quoted in verses 26–30. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He also wrote a letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:26 zf93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι 1 The commander begins this letter by speaking about himself and about the person to whom he is writing in the third person. That was the convention in this culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first and second persons to translate this. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to you, the most excellent Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
23:26 yk79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν 1 As was also the convention in this culture, the letter-writer leaves it unstated but understood that he is writing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply those words. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
23:26 vg8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κλαύδιος Λυσίας 1 The words **Claudius Lysias** are the name of the commander. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
23:26 u2ih rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι 1 The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to the Honorable Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
23:27 yy0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων, καὶ μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν & ἐξειλάμην 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Learning that the Jews had seized this man and that they were about to kill him … I rescued him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:27 zr7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 The commander is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
23:27 a538 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ῥωμαῖός 1 Here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:28 a539 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo κατήγαγον 1 The commander says that he took Paul ** down** to the Sanhedrin because he brought him down the steps from the Roman fortress to the temple courtyard. It may not be necessary to reproduce this detail in your translation. Alternate translation: “I brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
23:29 zt4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν; μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I found that the Jews were accusing him about questions of their law, but they were not accusing him of anything worthy of death or chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:29 wsh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν 1 The commander is using the word **death** to mean a penalty of death. He is referring to imprisonment by association with the way that the Romans used **chains** to secure prisoners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “execution or imprisonment” or “of being put to death or being put in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:30 i2ji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης & μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:31 ny4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
23:31 ifs1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 The word **Antipatris** is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
23:32 abd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ, ὑπέστρεψαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
23:33 abx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
23:34 dtx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
23:35 mga2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κελεύσας & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nPaul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Respect\n\nBoth the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2–4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Governmental leaders\n\nThe words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
24:1 a540 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain orator** to introduce **Tertullus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
24:1 f3vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ῥήτορος 1 In this context, the term **orator** means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
24:1 xm6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Τερτύλλου τινός 1 The word **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:1 a541 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατέβη 1 Luke says that these men **came down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring to traveling downward in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:2 a542 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κληθέντος & αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:2 a543 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κατηγορεῖν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:2 e6zg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τυγχάνοντες 1 By **we**, Tertullus means himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
24:2 qw1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns σοῦ & σῆς 1 Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:2 a544 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by **this people** he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:3 a545 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντῃ & πανταχοῦ & πάσης 1 Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
24:3 q3fj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Your Excellency, Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
24:3 r5jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **thankfulness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very gratefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
24:4 tyq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 By **us**, Tertullus means himself and the Jewish leaders on whose behalf he is speaking. He does not mean Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking. So use the exclusive form of “us” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
24:4 a546 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fairness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “briefly, knowing that you will judge our case fairly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
24:5 i1qs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λοιμὸν 1 Tertullus is speaking as if Paul was literally spreading disease. He means that Paul is causing trouble. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a troublemaker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24:5 k1v1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 Tertullus says this as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain this overstatement in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
24:5 zg4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῶν Ναζωραίων 1 In this context, the word **Nazarenes** is a name that people used at this time to describe believers in Jesus. Jesus himself was known as a Nazarene because he came from the town of Nazareth. See how you translated the same word in [2:22](../02/22.md), where it has that meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:6 a547 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὃν καὶ ἐκρατήσαμεν 1 Tertullus is making the case that Paul is a criminal, but he is leaving it up to Felix to decide what Paul’s punishment should be, so he is deliberately breaking off this sentence here. If this might be unclear to your readers, you could indicate his meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “whom we also arrested, and who deserves to be punished, but we will leave it to you to decide his punishment.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
24:6 a548 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of verse 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
24:8 a549 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρ’ οὗ 1 The pronoun **whom** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “From him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:9 rq5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who had come to Caesarea to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
24:11 a550 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ πλείους εἰσίν μοι ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς 1 Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it was only 12 days ago that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
24:12 my1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εὗρόν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jews who are accusing me found” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:14 k79p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:14 a551 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς ἐν τοῖς προφήταις γεγραμμένοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:14 a552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῖς προφήταις 1 The word **Prophets** is the name of a section of the Bible that contains the books in which the prophets recorded the messages that God gave them. Alternate translation: “the books that the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:15 nv5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **these** refers to the Jewish leaders who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “my accusers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:15 qza8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that God will make both the righteous and the unrighteous alive again after they have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
24:15 x1yd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 Paul is using the adjectives **righteous** and **unrighteous** as nouns to mean different groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of both people who have done what is right and people who have not done what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
24:16 a553 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν τούτῳ 1 The pronoun **this** refers to what Paul has just said in verses 14 and 15 about what he believes. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Because I believe these things,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:16 va3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 Paul is using this phrase to refer to the opinion or judgment of God and men by association with the way that they would assess anything that came to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
24:16 a554 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
24:17 p92m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
24:17 lrs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go παρεγενόμην 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
24:17 ryk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου 1 Paul is actually referring to the place where the people of the Jewish **nation** live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where my Jewish people live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
24:17 a555 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων & καὶ προσφοράς 1 By **alms** Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By **offerings** he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:18 a556 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 The pronoun **which** refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, ending verse 17 with a period. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:19 a557 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τινὲς & ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς ἔδει & παρεῖναι 1 As Paul defends himself by telling what happened in Jerusalem, he suddenly realizes that his actual accusers are not present. So he breaks off his sentence to bring this fact to the attention of Governor Felix. If this might be unclear to your readers, in your translation you could finish this part of the story and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews from Asia saw me in Jerusalem with a Gentile and they thought that I had brought him into the temple. Now they ought to be present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
24:20 a558 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may these themselves say” or “these themselves should say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
24:20 ag5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ οὗτοι 1 These pronouns refer to the Jewish leaders who have come to Caesarea to accuse Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jewish leaders who have come here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:20 a559 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy στάντος μου ἐπὶ τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 Paul is referring to what he said to the Sanhedrin to defend himself by association with the way he **stood** in front of the council as he said it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I defended myself at a meeting of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
24:21 a560 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἢ περὶ μιᾶς ταύτης φωνῆς, ἧς ἐκέκραξα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἑστὼς, ὅτι περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν. 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “other than that when I was standing among them, I shouted that I was being judged by them that day concerning the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
24:21 ds1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because I believe that God will make those who have died alive again,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
24:21 d2lm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι & ἐφ’ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:22 z5f9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καταβῇ 1 Felix says **may come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:23 a561 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδένα κωλύειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **none** and the negative verb **forbid**. Alternate translation: “to allow all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
24:23 a562 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἰδίων αὐτοῦ 1 By **his own**, Luke implicitly means Paul’s **own** friends. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of his friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24:24 qy9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δρουσίλλῃ 1 The word **Drusilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:24 xmq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ 1 The word **Jewess** is the name for a woman who is Jewish. Alternate translation: “who was a Jewish woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:25 a563 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
24:26 h4v7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul would give him money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:27 a564 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διετίας & πληρωθείσης 1 Luke is describing this time period in the way in which his culture and language spoke about time. The expression can refer to any period of time between one year and two years in length. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “after a couple of years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:27 ur2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πόρκιον Φῆστον 1 The words **Porcius Festus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
24:27 p59c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who were hostile to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
24:27 gln6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδεμένον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in bonds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:27 a566 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δεδεμένον 1 Luke is using one thing that the Romans did to keep Paul prisoner to represent all of what they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
25:intro b6uk 0 # Acts 25 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Favor\n\nThis word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]])\n\n### Roman citizenship\n\nThe Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens; others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
25:1 w8h3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent οὖν 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
25:1 a567 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπιβὰς 1 Luke is using one part of Festus, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Judea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having arrived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
25:1 a568 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ 1 By **the province**, Luke implicitly means the province of Judea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
25:1 zz4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας 1 Luke says that Festus **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25:2 a569 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most prominent of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
25:3 w8um rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Paul in each of these instances. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him … Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
25:3 pg8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέδραν ποιοῦντες ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 It was the Jewish leaders who were secretly **making an ambush**. This was not part of what they were **requesting** Festus to do. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But the Jewish leaders were secretly preparing an ambush to kill Paul along the way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
25:4 v5f9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ὁ & Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “Festus answered, ‘Paul is being held at Caesarea but I myself am about to depart soon’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
25:4 a570 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was holding Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:4 a571 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Festus means implicitly that he is **about to depart** from Jerusalem and travel to Caesarea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to depart Jerusalem for Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
25:5 a54h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ & ἐν ὑμῖν & δυνατοὶ 1 Festus is using the adjective **powerful** as a noun to mean a certain group of people. In this context, **powerful** means having the legal power to represent the Jewish nation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those of you who have legal standing in this matter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
25:5 a572 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom συνκαταβάντες 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Festus says **come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25:5 nei6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they accuse him” or “they should accuse him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
25:6 a573 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes ἡμέρας, οὐ πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “less than eight or ten days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
25:6 qv24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 Festus **sat in the judgment seat** as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
25:6 j7c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his soldiers to bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:7 v4v8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν 1 The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
25:7 e7g2 πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα 1 It may be more natural in your language not to use the word **and** between these adjectives. Alternate translation: “many serious charges” or “many charges that were all serious”
25:8 a574 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche εἰς Καίσαρά 1 Paul is using the leader of the Roman government to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
25:9 b49x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who were opposing Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
25:9 a575 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 Luke is speaking as if the Festus wanted to **lay down** a favor physically for the Jewish leaders, as if they would pick it up and leave something else for him in its place. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to do a favor for the Jewish leaders that they would later return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
25:9 l560 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς τῷ Παύλῳ εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Festus responded to Paul. Alternate translation: “Festus responded to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
25:9 qe8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς 1 Festus says **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25:9 wi2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα & ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem and have me judge you there about these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:10 u1ef rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι 1 Paul is referring to Caesar’s authority to judge him by association with the **judgment seat** where Caesar sat when he judged cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by Caesar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25:10 a576 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι 1 Paul is using **Caesar**, the leader of the Roman government, to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by the Roman government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
25:10 p78y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where it is necessary for someone to judge me”; or, if you translated the previous phrase as “I am being judged by the Roman government”: “which is the authority that ought to judge me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:11 l561 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **refuse**. Alternate translation: “I am willing to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
25:12 t96z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ συμβουλίου 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **council** here, he does not mean the Jewish Sanhedrin. He means the group of officials who advised Festus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
25:12 a577 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἐπὶ Καίσαρα πορεύσῃ 1 Festus is using a future statement to give a ruling in Paul’s case. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a ruling. Alternate translation: “so I grant your appeal and I am going to send you to Caesar for judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
25:13 c3gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
25:13 q0sv rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 The word **Agrippa** is the name of a man. He ruled a few territories in the area where Festus was the Roman governor. The word **Bernice** is the name a woman. She was the sister of King Agrippa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
25:13 a578 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατήντησαν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 Luke speaks of Agrippa and Bernice **having come down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem, where they lived. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25:14 x8jf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Felix has left a certain man a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:14 a579 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 Festus is using the phrase **A certain man** to introduce **Paul** to Agrippa and Bernice. If your language has its own way of introducing people and their stories, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “There is a man named Paul whom Felix left as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
25:15 hyp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requesting that I judge him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
25:16 l562 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ κατηγορούμενος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one against whom people are making accusations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:16 xjb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person by association with the way people can see the face of someone who is present. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “may meet face to face with the accusers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25:17 rm5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns συνελθόντων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests and the elders of the Jews, whom Festus mentioned in verse 15. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the chief priests and the elders of the Jews had come together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
25:17 efe2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 Festus **sat in the judgment seat** as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that I was ready to act as the judge in this case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
25:17 hm6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I commanded soldiers to bring the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:19 d1qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **religion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their religious beliefs” or “their beliefs about God and spiritual things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
25:20 l564 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔλεγον εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked, ‘Might you be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
25:20 y9bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κρίνεσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have me judge him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:21 ie7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ & Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when Paul asked that I keep him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:21 l570 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ 1 Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “of His Majesty the Emperor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
25:21 ceq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I commanded the guards to keep him in custody” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:22 l565 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἐβουλόμην καὶ αὐτὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀκοῦσαι 1 Agrippa is using the reflexive pronoun **myself** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I too would certainly want to hear this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
25:22 l566 φησίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “he said”
25:23 at4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25:24 l567 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πάντες οἱ & ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Festus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. (It is clear that women as well as men are **present**, since Luke notes in verse 23 that Bernice entered with Agrippa.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
25:24 l571 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 By **us**, Festus means himself and King Agrippa but not the rest of the crowd to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
25:24 n8qj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐνέτυχόν μοι 1 Festus says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the multitude of the Jews petitioned me urgently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
25:24 l568 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations βοῶντες μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “shouting, ‘He ought not to live any longer!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
25:24 yv2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he ought not to live no longer.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
25:25 g856 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to His Majesty The Empeor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
25:26 l569 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τῷ κυρίῳ 1 Festus is referring to the emperor by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to our lord the emperor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
25:26 fe2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῶν & σοῦ 1 Here the first instance of **you** is plural and refers to everyone assembled in the hall. The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. Use the plural and singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
25:27 txs6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον & μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ & σημᾶναι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **unreasonable**. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me, sending a prisoner, that I should state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
26:intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))\n\nPaul told King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and said that the governor should not punish him for that.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
26:1 l573 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιτρέπεταί σοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I permit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:1 wme6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα 1 This could mean: (1) that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (2) that as Paul spoke, he used hand gestures to emphasize the points he was making. Alternate translation: “gesturing with his hand as he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
26:2 mdq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the Jews accuse me of doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:2 cbr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαίων 1 Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
26:3 kns2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν κατὰ Ἰουδαίους, ἐθῶν τε καὶ ζητημάτων 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in a wide range of customs and controversies among the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
26:4 t8bg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἴσασι πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jews know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
26:4 x96h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου ἔν τε Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 By **nation**, Paul most likely means by association the people of his nation, that is, the Jews. Alternate translation: “among the Jews, especially in the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:5 y9a1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας 1 By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
26:6 s9kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent νῦν 1 Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
26:6 i9y5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἕστηκα κρινόμενος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:6 r42g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because I hope in the promise made to our fathers by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26:6 l574 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:6 l575 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Since Paul explains in verse 8 that the **promise** for which he has **hope** is the resurrection from the dead, here you do not need to explain further what Paul means. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
26:6 l576 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:6 l577 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
26:7 hnf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν 1 Paul is referring to the people of Israel by association with the way that nation was historically composed of 12 tribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:7 l578 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν 1 By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
26:7 l579 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ & λατρεῦον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serving earnestly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26:7 kzg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to refer to continuous activity throughout a full day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually” or, if you translated **serving in earnestness** as “serving earnestly”: “and continually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
26:7 a580 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews are accusing me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:7 c4lm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by these Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
26:8 de83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Paul is using the question form to challenge the Jewish leaders who are accusing him. Many of them are Pharisees who believe that God does raise the dead, and yet they do not believe that God raised Jesus from the dead. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “By accusing me, you are acting as if you do not believe that God raises the dead!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
26:8 l581 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular παρ’ ὑμῖν 1 While to this point Paul has used the word **you** in the singular to refer to Agrippa, here he uses it in the plural to refer to the Jewish leaders who are present. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
26:8 a599 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 Paul is speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility, but he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “that God raises the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
26:8 ukk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 Here, **raises the dead** is an idiom that refers to making someone who has died alive again. Alternate translation: “God makes the dead alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26:8 l582 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νεκροὺς 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
26:9 r4df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ 1 While in such contexts the word **name** often represents the person who has that name, Paul is describing a time when he did not believe that Jesus was still alive. So here the word **name** seems to represent the reputation and influence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the reputation and influence of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:10 b581 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῶν ἁγίων 1 Paul is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “of the believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:10 b582 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν 1 Paul is using one part of the process of putting someone on trial for a capital offense and punishing that person if he is found guilty to represent the entire process. Since he speaks of casting his **vote** in favor of execution, here he means specifically the trial part of the process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when they were being put on trial for crimes with a penalty of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
26:10 nys7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Sanhedrin was considering whether to execute them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:10 l584 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατήνεγκα ψῆφον 1 The implication is that Paul **cast his vote** as a member of the Sanhedrin. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “as a member of the Sanhedrin, I cast my vote against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:11 b584 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάσας τὰς συναγωγὰς & τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “going from one synagogue to another to punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
26:12 ajp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **authority** tells what kind of **commission** the **chief priests** gave Paul. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “with an authoritative commission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
26:14 l585 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, calling me twice by name, asking me why I was persecuting him, and telling me it was hard for me to kick against a goad.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
26:14 sip5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με 1 Paul is speaking of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “I heard someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
26:14 du3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
26:14 zsi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 The voice is speaking as if Paul were literally kicking against a **goad**, that is, a sharp object that people use to prod an animal. The voice means that by opposing Jesus and persecuting believers, Paul is hurting himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are hurting yourself by what you are doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:15 l586 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα, τίς εἶ, κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς, ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I asked the Lord who he was, and the Lord said that he was Jesus, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
26:15 l587 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε 1 When Paul replied to the voice, he was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, in your translation you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
26:15 l588 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness ὁ & Κύριος εἶπεν 1 In this case Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
26:16 l589 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὤφθην σοι, προχειρίσασθαί σε ὑπηρέτην καὶ μάρτυρα, ὧν τε εἶδές με ὧν τε ὀφθήσομαί σοι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He told me to get up and stand on my feet, because for this he had appeared to me, to appoint me a servant and a witness both of the things in which I had seen him and of the things in which he would be shown to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
26:16 a590 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου 1 It might seem that the expression **get up and stand on your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “stand up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
26:16 a591 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὀφθήσομαί σοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will show myself to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:17 a592 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐξαιρούμενός σε ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἐθνῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω σε, 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He told me that he would rescue me from the peoples and from the Gentiles, to whom he was sending me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
26:17 a593 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 By **the people**, Jesus means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:18 a594 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς, καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν, τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ κλῆρον ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
26:18 fk1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι 1 Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to understand the truth about him as if Paul would literally **open** the **eyes** of these people. Alternate translation: “to help them understand the truth about me so that they will turn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:18 gw8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to stop doing what is wrong and to start obeying God as if the Paul would be literally helping these people stop directing their attention to **darkness** and start directing it to **light**. Alternate translation: “so that they will stop doing what is wrong and start obeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:18 q3h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 By **authority**, Jesus implicitly means the control that **Satan** has over people who are under his authority. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and no longer have Satan control them but have God control them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:18 m65i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26:18 m9ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κλῆρον ἐν 1 Jesus is speaking of the blessings that he gives to those who believe in him as if they were an **inheritance** such as children receive from their parents. Alternate translation: “the blessings that I give to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:18 c5ij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom I sanctify because they have faith in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:19 zv2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **disobedient**. Alternate translation: “I was obedient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
26:19 sn4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 Paul is referring to Jesus by association with the way Jesus spoke to him in this **vision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus, who spoke to me from heaven in this vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:20 fei4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is speaking as if he declared that people should physically **turn** to God. He means that he proclaimed they should stop living in one way and begin to live in another way. Alternate translation: “start obeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:20 h1v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “doing deeds that showed that they had truly repented” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26:21 tl6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who opposed me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
26:22 t8f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ 1 Paul is referring to people of every kind by naming two extremes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to people of every kind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
26:22 f6py rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς & ὧν 1 If it would appear in your language that Paul was contradicting himself by saying that he spoke **nothing** and then describing what he spoke, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the same things that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
26:23 pe9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 Paul could be saying that this is what Moses and the prophets said about the Messiah. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They addressed the question as to whether the Christ would be a sufferer, as to whether he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:23 l597 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 Paul could be speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility even though he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now since the Christ was a sufferer, since he was the first from the resurrection of the dead, then he was going to proclaim light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
26:23 p9t8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the first person whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26:23 sc5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
26:23 z2ms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 Paul is saying that the truth that Jesus proclaimed about God was like a **light** that allowed people to see. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was going to proclaim the truth about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:23 a595 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ & λαῷ 1 By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:24 a596 ὁ Φῆστος & φησιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Festus said”
26:24 tk27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει 1 Festus is speaking of **learning** as if it were a living thing that was **turning** Paul from sanity to insanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have become insane from learning so much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
26:25 dur9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μαίνομαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **insane**. Alternate translation: “I am completely sane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
26:25 a6pb rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness κράτιστε Φῆστε 1 The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Honorable Governor Festus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
26:25 a597 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀληθείας καὶ σωφροσύνης ῥήματα 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the character of the **words** he is **speaking**. Alternate translation: “words that are true and sane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
26:26 cs7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness πρὸς ὃν καὶ παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ 1 Paul recognizes that he is being very outspoken in response to King Agrippa’s invitation to speak for himself, so he implicitly apologizes. In your translation, you could use a comparable expression from your language and culture. Alternate translation: “and I hope that he will pardon me for speaking so boldly as I talk to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
26:26 tta8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ πείθομαι οὐθέν 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “I am not persuaded that not any of these things eludes him.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am persuaded that not one of these things at all eludes him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
26:26 v1uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this did not happen in a corner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:26 xqr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this has been done openly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
26:26 i5wg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 Paul is speaking as if Jesus might have done things secretly, as if he had done them **in a corner** of a room where no one could see him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “secretly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26:27 a4a2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Paul asks this question to challenge **King Agrippa** to recognize that if he believes what the prophets wrote, then he should believe that Jesus rose from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should believe what I am saying about Jesus since you believe the prophets, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
26:28 y8qq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι? 1 Agrippa is using the question form to challenge Paul. He is asserting that what Paul has said so far is not sufficiently persuasive. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. The term **little** could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian with so little proof.” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian in such a short time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
26:29 a598 καὶ ἐν ὀλίγῳ καὶ ἐν μεγάλῳ 1 The term **little** could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “whether what I have said is enough or whether you need more proof” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “whether it takes a short time or a long time”
26:29 k7kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων 1 Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
26:31 blz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 The king and governor are referring to a penalty of death by association with **death** itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to receive the death penalty or to be kept in chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:31 dwyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δεσμῶν 1 These people who heard Paul speak are using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
26:32 n293 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You could have released this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:intro r82x 0 # Acts 27 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sailing\n\nPeople who lived near the sea traveled by boats powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.\n\n### Trust\n\nPaul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailors and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])\n\n### Paul breaks bread\n\nLuke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
27:1 b2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities decided that we should sail” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:1 l604 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:1 a600 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 As the General Notes to this chapter explain, here and in several other places Luke says “we,” **us**, and “our” to mean himself and others who were traveling with him, but not his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
27:1 s6ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ 1 Luke is using the phrase **a centurion** to introduce **Julius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
27:1 un2s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰουλίῳ 1 The word **Julius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:1 d22f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 The **Augustan regiment** was the name of the military unit from which this centurion came. Some versions translate this as the “Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:2 efe4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 The word ** Adramyttium ** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:2 dnr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πλοίῳ & μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was about to do by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was about to sail it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
27:2 h3uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀριστάρχου 1 The word **Aristarchus** is the name of a man who came from Macedonia but who had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:3 a602 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατήχθημεν εἰς Σιδῶνα 1 As the General Notes to this chapter explain, Luke says that he and the other travelers **came down** to Sidon because that was the customary way in this culture of describing people arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Sidon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:3 rp73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **care**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could care for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27:4 mjt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον 1 The expression **sailed under** does not mean that the travelers sailed south of the island of Cyprus, such as Luke describes in [21:3](../21/03.md), even though that would have been the shortest route. Rather, **sailed under** means that the ship kept close to the northern shore of the island, which loomed above the ship and blocked the wind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we stayed close to the northern shore of Cyprus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:5 y6m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the travelers got off the ship at **Myra**. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we came down to Myra of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:5 ni2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 The word **Myra** is the name of a city, and the word **Lycia** is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:6 j4cf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was doing by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was sailing it to Italy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
27:6 fdq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀλεξανδρῖνον 1 The word **Alexandrian** is the name for someone or something that comes from the city of Alexandria. See how you translated it in [18:24](../18/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:7 zzw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἱκαναῖς δὲ ἡμέραις, βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the ship was **sailing slowly** and **with difficulty** because it was sailing into the wind. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus because we were sailing into the wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:7 pye5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Κνίδον 1 The word **Cnidus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:7 mq4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Κρήτην & Σαλμώνην 1 The word **Crete** is the name of an island. See how you translated the word “Cretans” in [2:11](../02/11.md). The word **Salmone** is the name of a cape on the east end of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:8 b604 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν 1 The pronoun **it** refers the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing along the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
27:8 p4ri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μόλις 1 The implication is that even under the shelter of the island of Crete, the winds were still so strong as to make sailing to the west difficult. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with difficulty because the winds from the west were strong even there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:8 a64y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Καλοὺς Λιμένας 1 The word **Fair Havens** is the name of a port on the south coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:8 n7re rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names πόλις ἦν Λασαία 1 The word **Lasea** is the name of a city on the coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:9 a605 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that after this **fast**, which came in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even the fast had already passed and so there was a higher risk of seasonal storms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:9 u6x5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν νηστείαν 1 Luke is referring to the Day of Atonement by association with the way that Jews observed a **fast** in connection with that sacred day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Day of Atonement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
27:9 a606 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρῄνει ὁ Παῦλος 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the centurion and to the pilot and owner of the ship, as verse 11 makes clear. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was warning Julius and the pilot and the owner of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
27:10 p29v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θεωρῶ 1 Paul is speaking as if he could literally **see** the things he describes. He means that God has revealed them to him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has revealed to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27:10 nx9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **injury** and **loss**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “on this voyage, many of us will be injured and we will lose many valuable things. We will not only lose the cargo and the ship, we will lose our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27:11 b1kz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ & ἑκατοντάρχης τῷ κυβερνήτῃ καὶ τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μᾶλλον ἐπείθετο, ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the pilot and the captain were persuading the centurion more by what they were saying than Paul was persuading him by what he was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:11 a607 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ναυκλήρῳ 1 Here the word **captain** could mean: (1) someone who was in command of the ship. Alternate translation: “the ship’s commander” (2) someone who owned the ship and was in command of it. However, while this is a common meaning of the word, it is unlikely in this context. We learn from the story that this ship was carrying grain from Egypt to Italy and so it would have belonged to the emperor’s own fleet. Alternate translation: “the shipowner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:12 jmi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown λιμένος 1 A **harbor** is a place on the coast whose location and shape allow ships to come safely close to the land. If your language does not have a term for such a place, you could use a general description in your translation. Alternate translation: “place of access to the shore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:12 z1lf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown παραχειμασίαν & παραχειμάσαι 1 The terms **wintering** and **to winter** mean to stay in a place that is safe during the winter, which is a cold and stormy season in this location. If the seasons do not vary much in your location or if there is not a cold and stormy season, you could explain this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “staying during a cold and stormy season … to stay there during the cold and stormy season” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:12 k2ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φοίνικα 1 The word **Phoenix** is the name of a port city on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:12 a608 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 This expression means that the Phoenix harbor provided access for ships to sail out in the directions that the winds coming from the **southwest** and the **northwest** blew. That is, ships would sail out to the northeast and southeast from the harbor, and they would enter the harbor from the northeast or southeast. Your language and culture may have a comparable expression of its own that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could describe this in general terms. Alternate translation: “looking down the northwest wind and down the southwest wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:12 x6vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 Luke is speaking as if the harbor of Phoenix was literally **looking** in these directions. He means that it gave access for ships to sail in those directions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “giving access for sailing to the northeast or to the southeast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27:12 gyd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown λίβα & χῶρον 1 These directions are based on the rising and setting of the sun. The **southwest** is somewhat to the left of the setting sun, and the **northwest** is somewhat to the right of the setting sun. If you decide to use the terms “northeast” and “southeast” instead, based on the two previous notes, the northeast is somewhat to the left of the rising sun and the southeast is somewhat to the right of the rising sun. Your language and culture may have their own terms for these directions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:13 xx67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄραντες 1 An **anchor** is a heavy object that is attached to a rope that is tied to a ship. The ship’s crew tosses the anchor into the water and it sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. The crew raises the anchor out of the water when it is time for the ship to travel. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. Alternate translation: “having weighed anchor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:13 a603 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρελέγοντο 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the crew of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the crew was sailing the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
27:14 m2xe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μετ’ οὐ πολὺ 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “after a short time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
27:14 g1ek rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων 1 The term **Euraklyon** is a combination of the Greek word for the east wind and the Latin word for the north wind. Luke spells out the term using Greek letters so that his readers will know how it sounds. This seems to be the name that Luke heard the sailors give to this wind. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also say what it means. Alternate translation: “called the Northeaster” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
27:14 lrs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ καλούμενος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the sailors called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:14 tz2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῆς 1 The pronoun **it** refers to the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
27:15 a609 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the wind seized the ship, so that we were not able to face into the wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:15 a610 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification συναρπασθέντος & τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 Luke is speaking of the **wind** as if it were a living thing that **seized** the **ship**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the wind blowing with such force that it kept the ship from sailing in the direction from which it was coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
27:15 a611 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 Luke is speaking as if the ship literally had a **face** that it could turn towards the wind. Your language may have an expression that suits this context and that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to bear up against the wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27:15 w1hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐφερόμεθα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind drove us along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:16 c4cg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες, καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 The expression **running under** is a sailing term that means to go along a specific side of some land in order to block the wind. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “sailing under the lee of a certain island called Cauda” or “sailing on the side of an island called Cauda where the wind was not so strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:16 a612 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive νησίον & τι & καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a certain island that people called Cauda” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:16 aq56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Καῦδα 1 The word **Cauda** is the name of a small island located off the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:16 h9z2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῆς σκάφης 1 A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that crews sometimes tow behind their larger ship and sometimes bring up onto the ship and tie down. They use the smaller boat for various reasons, including escaping from the larger ship if it is sinking. If your language does not have a term for a smaller boat like this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the smaller utility boat that the ship was towing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:17 tx1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον 1 The word **helps** is a nautical term that means ropes or cables. The word **undergirding** describes the process of running ropes or cables around the bottom of a ship so that the ship will not come apart during a storm. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were tying ropes around the bottom of the ship so that it would not come apart during the storm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:17 a613 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐχρῶντο 1 Here and in the next two verses, the pronoun **they** refers to the sailors of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were using” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
27:17 a614 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μὴ εἰς τὴν Σύρτιν ἐκπέσωσιν 1 The expression **fall into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship becoming stuck in quicksand. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they might run aground on the Syrtis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:17 dvv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Σύρτιν 1 The word **Syrtis** is the name of a large mass of quicksand near the north coast of Africa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:17 l615 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὴν Σύρτιν 1 Quicksand, which the word **Syrtis** describes, is sand that is saturated with water. It does not support the weight of a person, so sailors cannot get out of a ship to free it if the ship gets stuck in quicksand. If your readers would not be familiar with quicksand, you could describe it generally in your translation. Alternate translation: “the large mass of waterlogged sand off the north coast of Africa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:17 l8kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος 1 The term **gear** could mean: (1) the sails of the ship and the rigging that the sailors uses to raise and lower the sails. If this is the meaning, then Luke is saying that without sails, the sailors could not steer the ship and it had to go wherever the wind drove it. Alternate translation: “taking down the sails” (2) a sea anchor, that is, some object that the sailors would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow the ship down. If this is the meaning, then the sailors lowered this sea anchor in the hopes that the storm would end before they reached the quicksand. Alternate translation: “putting a sea anchor into the water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:17 g7rw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐφέροντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was driving them along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:18 fx4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σφοδρῶς & χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was tossing us exceedingly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:18 nd5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο 1 The word **jettison** is a nautical term that describes sailors throwing the cargo of a ship (the goods that the ship is transporting) into the sea to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent it from sinking. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were throwing the cargo of the ship into the sea to make the ship lighter to try to keep it from sinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:19 l617 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ 1 In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” So here, **the third day** means two days after the sailors tied ropes around the ship and one day after the sailors threw the cargo overboard. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “on the day after that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:19 a641 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ 1 If you retain this idiom but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
27:19 vm2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sailors **threw the equipment … overboard** in a desperate effort to make the ship even lighter. In this context, **equipment** refers to everything the sailors needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates that they had given up on sailing the ship and were hoping just to survive. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they became so desperate that they threw overboard everything they needed to sail the ship, hoping just to survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:19 l616 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche αὐτόχειρες 1 Luke is using one part of the sailors, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of throwing the cargo overboard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
27:20 if7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μήτε & ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the **sun** and **stars** did not appear because the dark storm clouds obscured them. Luke also assumes that his readers will understand that sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and in what direction they were headed. So this is a further indication of how desperate the situation was. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “since the sailors could not determine their position or nagivate the ship because the dark storm clouds prevented the sun and stars from appearing for many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:20 p2wd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes χειμῶνός & οὐκ ὀλίγου 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great storm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
27:20 lrs6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐπικειμένου 1 Luke is speaking of the storm as if they were a living thing that was **lying upon** the ship. He means that the storm continued to buffet the ship without ever letting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continually buffeting the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
27:20 mnj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the same ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we finally lost all hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:20 l618 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we finally stopped hoping that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27:20 l619 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it finally became very difficult to hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
27:21 d1le rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῆς & ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **abstinence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as we had gone a long time without eating food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27:21 zns2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction σταθεὶς & ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 Paul **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of them to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
27:21 bc1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν 1 The terms **injury** and **loss** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “such a great loss” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
27:22 djh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀποβολὴ & ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν, πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there will be no loss of life among you, there will only be loss of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
27:23 a620 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὗ εἰμι, ᾧ καὶ λατρεύω 1 The phrases **whose I am** and **whom I serve** mean similar things. Paul is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the God I worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
27:24 a621 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, μὴ φοβοῦ, Παῦλε; Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι, καὶ ἰδοὺ, κεχάρισταί σοι ὁ Θεὸς πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The angel told me that I should not be afraid, because it was necessary for me to stand before Caesar, and behold, God had graciously granted to me all the ones sailing with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
27:24 a622 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 The angel is using the term **behold** to focus Paul’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27:24 z1j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι 1 The angel is using one aspect of the trial process, the fact that an accused person would **stand before** a judge, to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must appear in Caesar’s court so that he can judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
27:25 r9t8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way the angel told me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:26 vmp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς νῆσον & τινα & ἐκπεσεῖν 1 The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on the shore of an island. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “to run aground on some island” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:27 rrm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “night 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
27:27 la7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διαφερομένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was driving us about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:27 afs6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ 1 The word **Hadria** is the term that people of this culture used to describe the open Mediterranean Sea between Italy and Malta on the west and Greece and Crete on the east. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
27:27 a623 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification προσάγειν τινὰ αὐτοῖς χώραν 1 Luke is speaking of this **land** as if it were a living thing that was **approaching** the sailors on the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were approaching some land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
27:28 ruj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom βολίσαντες 1 The expression **taking soundings** is a nautical term that describes sailors determining the depth of the water. Sailors measure this by dropping a marked line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:28 tq53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι & ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε 1 A **fathom** is a unit of measurement of the depth of water. One fathom is equal to about two meters or about six feet. Alternate translation: “40 meters … 30 meters” or “120 feet … 90 feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
27:29 a624 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ & ἐκπέσωμεν 1 The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on **some rugged place**. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “we might run aground on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:29 q4am rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρύμνης 1 The word **stern** is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:30 rr89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρῴρης 1 The word **bow** is a nautical term that means the front of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the front of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:31 sz8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to save yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:32 a625 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκπεσεῖν 1 The expression **fall away** is a nautical term that in this context could mean: (1) that the soldiers let the lifeboat fall into the water where none of the sailors could get into it, because it was no longer tied to the ship. Alternate translation: “fall into the water” (2) that the soldiers let the lifeboat, which was already in the water, drift away where none of the sailors could get into it. Alternate translation: “drift away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:33 j5yg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν, προσδοκῶντες & διατελεῖτε 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “This is now day 14 that you have been anxiously waiting, and you are continuing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
27:33 a626 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄσιτοι & μηθὲν προσλαβόμενοι 1 The expressions **fasting** and **having eaten nothing** mean similar things. Paul is using the two expressions together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to eat nothing at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
27:34 a627 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο & πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this will save you” or “this will keep you alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27:34 j3qx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐδενὸς & ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται 1 Paul is using one part of each of his listeners, a **hair** from his **head**, to represent all of that listener. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of you will survive without suffering harm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
27:36 zt9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὔθυμοι & γενόμενοι πάντες 1 The phrase **were … encouraged** is not actually a passive form in Greek. The word translated **encouraged** is an adjective. However, this phrase might sound like a passive verbal form in other langauges. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this encouraged them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:37 ynq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἤμεθα & αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ 1 This is background information about the number of people on the ship. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
27:37 a628 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche αἱ & ψυχαὶ 1 Luke is using one part of the people on the ship, their **souls**, to represent their entire selves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
27:38 a629 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κορεσθέντες & τροφῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having eaten enough food to satisfy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:39 a643 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον 1 Here and in the rest of this verse and in the next verse, the pronoun **they** refers to the sailors. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were not recognizing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
27:39 vdk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κόλπον & τινα 1 A **bay** is a large area of water that partly surrounded by land but open to a larger body of water. Your language may have a specific expression for this kind of area. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “a certain area of water sheltered by the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:40 ntr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων 1 The words **bands** and **rudders** are nautical terms. The **rudders** were large pieces of wood at the back of the ship that the sailors used for steering the ship. The **bands** were ropes or cords that held the rudders out of the water while anchors were holding the ship in one place. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the ropes that held out of the water the pieces of wood that the sailors used to steer the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:40 cn2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸν ἀρτέμωνα 1 A sail is a large piece of cloth that catches the wind in order to propel a ship through the water. A **topsail** is a sail that sailors place at the top of a mast on a ship. A mast is a vertical pole with cross-poles that hold sails. Alternate translation: “the sail that sailors put at the top of a pole, high above the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
27:40 pa1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν 1 In this context, the expression **they were heading** is a nautical term that describes a ship moving in a specific direction. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were steering the ship toward the beach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:41 a630 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom περιπεσόντες & εἰς 1 The expression **having fallen into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship striking land. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “striking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:41 y22n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τόπον διθάλασσον 1 The expression **a place between two seas** is a nautical term that describes a sandbar that extends out from the land. A sandbar forms when a sea current coming from one direction flows across a sea current coming from another direction. This causes the sand under the water to pile up, making the water shallow and dangerous for ships. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “a sandbar extending out from the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:41 a631 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ πρύμνα ἐλύετο ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the violence was breaking up the stern” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
27:41 a632 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is referring to the **violence** of the waves that were hitting the **stern** of the ship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by the violence of the waves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:41 a634 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **violence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the waves that were hitting it were so strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27:44 a644 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the rest to depart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
28:intro w8yn 0 # Acts 28 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nNo one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Letters” and “brothers”\n\nThe Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.\n\nWhen the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “He was a god”\n\nThe native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
28:1 j1yf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διασωθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it seems that Luke means to say that it was God. Alternate translation: “after God had brought us safely through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:1 a635 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the island Malta” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:1 f8y4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μελίτη 1 The word **Malta** is the name of an island located south of the island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:2 e7w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἵ & βάρβαροι 1 Luke is using the word **barbarians** in the specific sense that it had in his culture. He means people who did not speak Greek or Latin. From his perspective and the perspective of the others with him, they were “foreigners,” but from their own perspectives, they were “natives” of the island. It may be appropriate to describe them that way in your translation. Alternate translation: “the natives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:2 r7jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν 1 Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary benevolence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
28:3 g4ad rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἔχιδνα 1 A **viper** is a dangerous poisonous snake. If your readers would not recognize this name, you could use the name of another poisonous snake they might recognize or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a snake whose venom was poisonous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:4 ma1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἡ δίκη 1 The word **Justice** is the name of a false god who the people of this time believed would avenge crimes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:6 m11i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτὸν μέλλειν πίμπρασθαι, ἢ καταπίπτειν ἄφνω νεκρόν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the effects of the venom would begin to inflame him or that he would suddenly fall down dead” or “that the effects of the venom would make his body start to swell or that he would suddenly fall down dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:6 i6i6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **nothing** and the negative adjective **unusual**. Alternate translation: “everything happening to him as usual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
28:6 u81u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μεταβαλόμενοι 1 Luke is speaking as if the natives of Malta were literally **turning themselves around**. He means that they came to a different opinion about who Paul was. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression from your own language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “changing their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:6 cfe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘He is a god!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
28:7 r95r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 Luke is using the word **Now** to introduce background information about **Publius** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
28:7 wx6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῷ πρώτῳ 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular kind of person. In this context, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Since **Publius** is a Roman name, this man was probably the Roman governor of the island. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of the most prominent man” or “of the Roman governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
28:7 wh2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ποπλίῳ 1 The word **Publius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:8 m154 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom fevers and dysentery were afflicting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:8 fr46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown δυσεντερίῳ 1 The word **dysentery** describes an infectious intestinal disease. In your translation, you could use a term a similar disease, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “intestinal disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:9 yk6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was healing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:10 ydg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that these **honors** probably included gifts. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “gave us many gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:11 jc5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι 1 The word **Dioscouri** is the name of two false gods, Castor and Pollux, whom some sailors considered to be their patron gods. The name means “Sons of Zeus” in Greek. Alternate translation: “with Castor and Pollux as their figurehead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:11 a636 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι 1 A **figurehead** was an image of a god, human being, animal, or object that was painted or sculpted on the prow (front) of a ship as a good luck token. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “with images of Castor and Pollux sculpted on the prow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:12 a637 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καταχθέντες εἰς Συρακούσας 1 Luke says that he and the others traveling with him had **come down** to Syracuse because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed at Syracuse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:12 w5c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Συρακούσας 1 The word **Syracuse** is the name of a city on the southeast coast of the island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:13 a638 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν εἰς Ῥήγιον 1 Luke says that he and those traveling with him **came down to Rhegium** because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Rhegium” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:13 z2u4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ῥήγιον 1 The word **Rhegium** is the name of a port city that was located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:13 tz4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ποτιόλους 1 The word **Puteoli** is the name of a city that was located on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:14 m1is rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὺς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:14 a2c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεκλήθημεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:14 bc3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν 1 Since Luke describes in the next verse how believers from Rome came some distance to meet Paul and his companions on their way to Rome, by **thus** he means that after staying with the believers in Puetoli for seven days, they continued on their way to Rome. In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “we came near Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
28:15 a639 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κἀκεῖθεν 1 By **there**, Luke implicitly means Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “From Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:15 a640 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:15 k754 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 The implication is that these believers had heard from the believers in Puteoli while Paul and his companions were staying with them that they were on their way to Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having learned from the believers in Puteoli that we were coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:15 m9tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαβε θάρσος 1 Here, **courage** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could **take**. Alternate translation: “became encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:15 se8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀππίου Φόρου & Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν 1 The phrase **the Forum of Appius** is the name of a popular market on the main highway to Rome that was called the Appian Way. The Forum of Appius was about 40 miles or about 60 kilometers south of Rome. The phrase **Three Taverns** is the name of an inn on that same highway about 30 miles or about 45 kilometers south of Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
28:16 te8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman officials allowed Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:16 a642 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθ’ ἑαυτὸν 1 Since there was a **soldier** with Paul who was **guarding him**, Luke does not mean that Paul stayed all **by himself**. Rather, he means that the Roman authorities allowed Paul to live in a rented house (as verse 30 indicates) rather than putting him in prison. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in a rented house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:17 vf7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
28:17 d77z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “most prominent among the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
28:17 e1dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:17 a615 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:17 a664 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθεσι τοῖς πατρῴοις 1 Paul is using the term **fathers’** to describe customs that have been passed down among the Jews through the generations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ancestral customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:17 g55i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:17 hgk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγώ & δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem delivered me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:17 x3r2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας 1 Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the custody” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:18 fed7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί 1 Paul is referring to a penalty of death by association with **death** itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to deserve the death penalty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:19 lr96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
28:19 n6vf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my concern for my safety forced me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:19 e7gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ ἔθνους μου 1 Paul is referring by association to the people of the Jewish **nation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:20 a616 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what Israel is hoping for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28:20 b1fd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἵνεκεν & τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 Paul is referring by association to something that the people of Israel had **hope** for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) the hope that God would send the Messiah. Alternate translation: “because I believe God has sent the Messiah” (2) the hope that God would make people who had died alive again. Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will make people who have died alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:20 n3s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 Paul is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
28:20 a617 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this chain is binding me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:20 pgr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chain** with which he is bound, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Romans are keeping me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
28:21 x5d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 By **We**, these Jewish leaders mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
28:21 y4bx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 These Jewish leaders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:21 a618 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἀπήγγειλεν ἢ ἐλάλησέν τι 1 The terms **reported** and **said** mean similar things. The Jewish leaders are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “nor have any of the brothers, coming, told us anything at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
28:22 gy8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:22 j12v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀντιλέγεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people speak against it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:22 a619 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πανταχοῦ 1 The Jewish leaders say **everywhere** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in places throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
28:23 a645 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πλείονες 1 Luke is using the adjective **more** as a noun to mean the larger number of people who came to hear Paul speak. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “more people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
28:23 dg5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “testifying about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28:23 peu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ἀπό τε τοῦ νόμου Μωϋσέως, καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Luke is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming two of their major parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from passages throughout the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
28:24 pmd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying convinced some” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:25 n7pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰπόντος & ῥῆμα ἓν 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made this last statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28:25 a646 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:26 qj7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation inside the first one. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to go to the people of Israel and tell them that by hearing they would hear but they would not understand at all and that seeing they would see but they would not perceive at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
28:26 a647 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks λέγων, πορεύθητι 1 This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
28:26 a648 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ 1 This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
28:26 pax8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε & βλέποντες βλέψετε 1 Isaiah is using a Hebrew idiom, the repetition of a verb to express the intensity of an action. It may not be possible to translate this Hebrew practice of verb repetition directly into many languages. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb in your language. Alternate translation: “You will try very hard to hear … you will try very hard to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:26 a649 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You will become aware of what is happening around you but you will not understand the significance of what is happening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
28:26 s1ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε & καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
28:26 a650 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 This is the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with a closing third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
28:27 fz42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν, μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν, καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to say that because the heart of that people had been thickened, and with their ears they had hardly heard, and they had shut their eyes. Otherwise they might have seen with their eyes, and they might have heard with their ears, and they might have understood with their heart and turned back, and God would have healed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
28:27 a651 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 These three phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “For this people is stubbornly refusing to use its senses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
28:27 ts5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη & ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:27 a652 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία 1 Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:27 a653 ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts of these people”
28:27 ngve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία & τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts of people. Alternate translation: “the thinking … with their thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:27 a654 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπαχύνθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has become thick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:27 f5m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 Isaiah is speaking as if the people of Israel have become unable to hear and have **shut their eyes** so that they will not see. He means that they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:27 a655 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν & ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς & τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 It might seem that these expressions contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten them. Alternate translation: “they have hardly heard anything … they might see clearly … they might hear clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
28:27 a656 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they might use their senses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
28:27 q8c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 Isaiah is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:27 vb9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 This does not mean God would only **heal** the people physically. He would also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. Alternate translation: “I would heal them and forgive them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
28:27 a657 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 This is the end of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with closing second-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
28:28 a658 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν & ἔστω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
28:28 e8hb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who has done the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent me to proclaim this salvation of his to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:28 b2za rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28:28 d18n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτοὶ & ἀκούσονται 1 In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand and obey,” since Paul is drawing a contrast with the stubborn response of many of the Jews. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they will understand the message and obey it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
28:29 a659 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
28:30 c56e rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory ἐνέμεινεν δὲ διετίαν ὅλην ἐν ἰδίῳ μισθώματι 1 This is the beginning of information that Luke presents to bring the story of the book of Acts to a close. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
28:30 a660 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐνέμεινεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul stayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
28:31 wv1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28:31 a661 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας ἀκωλύτως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **boldness** and **hindrance**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “very boldly, with no one hindering him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28:31 a662 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink